1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes false
138 \output_changes false
152 by the \SpecialChar LyX
157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
159 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
160 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
161 Documentation mailing list:
162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
164 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
175 \begin_inset Newline newline
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Note Note
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
194 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
216 What is \SpecialChar LyX
220 \begin_layout Standard
222 is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
282 's philosophy: most importantly,
283 the format of all of the manuals.
284 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
285 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
291 manual describes that, too.
294 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
301 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
303 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
304 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
310 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
311 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
313 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
314 only a vertical scrollbar.
315 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
316 The first case is large images.
317 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
318 image and use the option
329 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
332 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
333 this doesn't work for equations yet.
336 \begin_layout Standard
337 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
338 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
346 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
353 \begin_layout Section
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
360 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
362 Just select the manual you want to read from the
369 \begin_layout Section
370 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
374 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
383 can be configured via the menu
385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
389 \begin_inset Index idx
392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
399 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 packages are available.
403 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
405 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
407 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
412 \begin_inset space \space{}
415 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
418 To force \SpecialChar LyX
419 to re-inspect your system, you should use
421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 \begin_inset Index idx
428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
429 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
435 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
436 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
439 \begin_layout Section
442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
444 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
451 \begin_layout Standard
452 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
453 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 installed, but you will not be
455 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
456 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
457 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
458 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
459 document can always be output as plain text
463 \begin_layout Standard
464 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
465 or DocBook classes or packages.
466 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
467 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
473 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
476 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
484 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
485 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 \begin_inset Index idx
495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
496 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
504 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
511 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
515 \begin_layout Chapter
516 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
520 \begin_layout Section
521 Basic File Operations
522 \begin_inset Index idx
525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
534 \begin_layout Standard
539 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
540 in addition to some more advanced operations:
543 \begin_layout Itemize
565 \begin_layout Itemize
581 arg "buffer-new-template"
587 \begin_layout Itemize
609 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
633 \begin_layout Itemize
655 \begin_layout Itemize
667 arg "buffer-write-as"
673 \begin_layout Itemize
687 \begin_layout Itemize
701 \begin_layout Standard
702 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
703 a few minor differences.
706 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
717 command lists the available templates.
718 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
719 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
720 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
728 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
735 \begin_layout Standard
736 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
769 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
770 is just that — a big, blank space.
778 \begin_layout Standard
799 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
804 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
807 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
825 will reload the document from disk.
826 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
827 and want to restore it to the last save.
836 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
837 them as your changes.
840 \begin_layout Section
841 Basic Editing Features
842 \begin_inset Index idx
845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
854 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
861 \begin_layout Standard
862 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
863 can perform cut and paste operations
864 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
865 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
866 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
867 editing features and how to access
869 We will start with cut and paste.
872 \begin_layout Standard
873 As you might expect, the
877 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
878 various other editing features.
879 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
883 \begin_layout Itemize
889 \begin_inset Index idx
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
921 \begin_layout Itemize
927 \begin_inset Index idx
930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
959 \begin_layout Itemize
965 \begin_inset Index idx
968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
1003 \begin_layout Itemize
1007 \begin_inset space ~
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1017 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset Index idx
1030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1039 \begin_inset Index idx
1042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1057 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1067 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1073 \begin_layout Standard
1074 The first three are self-explanatory.
1075 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1076 and other programs by
1097 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1098 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1103 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1104 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1105 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1106 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1107 into individual cells.
1111 \begin_inset space ~
1116 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1117 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1121 \begin_layout Standard
1125 \begin_inset space ~
1130 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1132 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1134 \begin_inset space ~
1141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1147 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1148 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1149 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1155 \begin_inset space \space{}
1158 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1159 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1162 \begin_inset space ~
1165 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1184 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1185 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1187 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1191 \begin_inset space ~
1196 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1197 start a new paragraph.
1198 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1199 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1204 \begin_inset space ~
1207 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1224 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1227 paste from the primary selection.
1228 This is normally the currently selected text.
1231 \begin_layout Standard
1234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1236 \begin_inset space ~
1240 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1258 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1264 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1281 button to skip the current word.
1285 \begin_inset space ~
1290 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1299 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1301 If the toggle is set, searching for
1302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1313 will not match the word
1314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1328 Match whole words only
1330 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1331 to only find complete words, e.
1332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1361 offers also an advanced
1364 \begin_inset space ~
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1373 feature that is described in section
1374 \begin_inset space ~
1378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1380 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1387 \begin_layout Standard
1388 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1389 \begin_inset space \space{}
1393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1401 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1403 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1408 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1419 arg "inset-select-all"
1422 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1423 When the cursor is inside an inset
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 selects the content of the inset.
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1441 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1444 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1448 \begin_layout Section
1450 \begin_inset Index idx
1453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1460 \begin_inset Index idx
1463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1472 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1479 \begin_layout Standard
1480 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1482 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1488 or the toolbar button
1494 to undo some mistake.
1495 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1497 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1500 or the toolbar button
1507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1514 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1518 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1521 \begin_layout Standard
1522 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1531 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1532 This is a consequence of the 100
1533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1536 step undo limit mentioned above.
1539 \begin_layout Standard
1548 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1550 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1554 \begin_layout Section
1556 \begin_inset Index idx
1559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1568 \begin_layout Standard
1569 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1572 \begin_layout Enumerate
1577 \begin_layout Itemize
1582 once anywhere in the edit window.
1583 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1587 \begin_layout Enumerate
1592 \begin_layout Itemize
1599 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1602 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1605 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1606 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1609 \begin_layout Itemize
1610 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1613 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1620 \begin_layout Enumerate
1621 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1625 \begin_layout Standard
1626 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1627 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1631 \begin_layout Section
1633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1635 name "sec:Navigating"
1640 \begin_inset Index idx
1643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1652 \begin_layout Standard
1654 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1657 \begin_layout Itemize
1662 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1663 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1666 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1669 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1671 \begin_inset space ~
1676 or by the toolbar button
1679 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1685 \begin_layout Itemize
1686 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1688 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1691 and use the same menu to return to them.
1692 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1695 \begin_layout Standard
1699 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1704 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1705 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1707 \begin_inset space ~
1712 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1713 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1714 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1715 your last editing position.
1718 \begin_layout Standard
1723 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1727 \begin_layout Subsection
1729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1731 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1736 \begin_inset Index idx
1739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1740 Navigating ! Outline
1746 \begin_inset Index idx
1749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1759 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1760 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1761 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1763 \begin_inset space ~
1767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1769 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1773 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1774 \begin_inset space ~
1778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1780 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1785 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1789 \begin_layout Standard
1790 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1791 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1792 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1793 dialog and to modify the citation.
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1799 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1800 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1808 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1811 \begin_layout Standard
1812 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1813 you further to control the display.
1818 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1819 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1825 option keeps it in the current view state.
1826 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1827 \begin_inset space ~
1830 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1831 \begin_inset space ~
1834 3, the subsections of sections
1835 \begin_inset space ~
1838 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1843 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1848 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1858 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1861 \begin_layout Standard
1868 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1869 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1883 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1884 So, for example, you can move section
1885 \begin_inset space ~
1889 \begin_inset space ~
1892 2.4 or after section
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1898 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 (or the corresponding key bindings
1919 ) you can change the level of sections.
1920 So you can for example make section
1921 \begin_inset space ~
1925 \begin_inset space ~
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1935 \begin_layout Subsection
1936 Horizontal Scrolling
1937 \begin_inset Index idx
1940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1941 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1951 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1957 \begin_inset space \space{}
1961 \begin_inset space ~
1964 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1965 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1966 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1970 \begin_layout Standard
1971 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1975 \begin_layout Itemize
1977 is used on a small tablet computer
1980 \begin_layout Itemize
1981 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1993 \begin_inset space ~
2006 \begin_layout Itemize
2007 Math constructs with long command names
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2012 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2014 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2015 windows so that table
2016 \begin_inset space ~
2020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2022 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2027 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2029 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2030 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2033 \begin_layout Standard
2034 \begin_inset Float table
2040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2041 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2046 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2050 Horizontal scrolling test.
2058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Tabular
2061 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2062 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2107 \begin_layout Section
2108 Input/Word Completion
2109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2111 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2116 \begin_inset Index idx
2119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_inset Index idx
2129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_layout Standard
2162 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2164 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2165 is used to propose completions.
2168 \begin_layout Standard
2169 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2172 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2177 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2184 \begin_inset space ~
2188 \begin_inset space ~
2193 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2197 \begin_inset space ~
2202 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2203 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2213 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2214 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2215 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2216 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2219 \begin_layout Standard
2221 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2222 completions available.
2227 key to accept a proposed completion.
2228 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2229 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2230 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2237 \begin_layout Standard
2238 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2239 ing options for text.
2240 The special math option
2244 enables characters to be composed.
2245 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2246 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2249 , you can then input the characters
2250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2261 to a formula to get it.
2262 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2263 of the math toolbar.
2264 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2268 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2269 's installation folder.
2270 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2279 \begin_layout Section
2281 \begin_inset Index idx
2284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2291 \begin_inset Index idx
2294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2323 \begin_inset Index idx
2326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2357 \begin_layout Standard
2358 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2372 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2375 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2379 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2380 \begin_inset space ~
2384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2386 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2393 \begin_layout Standard
2397 \begin_inset space ~
2405 \begin_inset space ~
2426 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2430 \begin_layout Labeling
2431 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2435 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2436 LatexCommand nomenclature
2438 description "Tabulator key"
2444 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2446 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2447 \begin_inset space ~
2451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2453 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2460 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2464 , especially section
2465 \begin_inset space ~
2469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2471 reference "subsec:Lists"
2477 If you are still confused, look in the
2482 \begin_inset Newline newline
2490 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2491 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2495 \begin_layout Labeling
2496 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2500 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2501 LatexCommand nomenclature
2503 description "Escape key"
2510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2517 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2518 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2521 \begin_layout Labeling
2522 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2528 \begin_inset space ~
2532 \begin_inset space ~
2539 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2540 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2544 \begin_layout Standard
2545 There are three modifier keys:
2548 \begin_layout Labeling
2549 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2567 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2568 LatexCommand nomenclature
2570 description "Control key"
2574 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2575 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2579 \begin_layout Itemize
2588 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2591 \begin_layout Itemize
2600 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2603 \begin_layout Itemize
2612 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2616 \begin_layout Labeling
2617 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2635 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2636 LatexCommand nomenclature
2638 description "Shift key"
2642 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2643 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2646 \begin_layout Labeling
2647 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2665 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2666 LatexCommand nomenclature
2668 description "Alt or Meta key"
2672 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2673 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2674 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2680 \begin_inset Newline newline
2683 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2685 menu accelerator keys
2688 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2689 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2693 \begin_layout Standard
2694 For example, the sequence
2695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2701 \begin_inset space ~
2705 \begin_inset space ~
2711 \begin_inset space ~
2719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2738 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2754 \begin_layout Standard
2759 manual lists all other things bound to the
2767 \begin_layout Standard
2768 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2770 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2771 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2772 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2773 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2774 The \SpecialChar LyX
2775 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2776 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2777 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2779 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2795 followed by a capital
2802 \begin_layout Chapter
2805 \begin_inset Index idx
2808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2818 \begin_layout Section
2820 \begin_inset Index idx
2823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2832 \begin_layout Subsection
2836 \begin_layout Standard
2837 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2838 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2839 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2840 numbering schemes, and so on.
2841 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2842 and format the title of your document differently.
2845 \begin_layout Standard
2850 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2851 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2852 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2853 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2854 picks one for you by default.
2855 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2858 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_inset Index idx
2863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2872 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2879 \begin_layout Standard
2880 You can select a class using the
2882 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2883 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2887 \begin_inset Index idx
2890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2897 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2911 \begin_layout Description
2912 Article for basic articles
2915 \begin_layout Description
2916 Report for basic reports
2919 \begin_layout Description
2920 Book for writing a book
2923 \begin_layout Description
2924 Letter for US-style letters
2927 \begin_layout Standard
2928 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2929 only uses if you have installed
2930 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2931 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2932 distributions will include
2934 Here are some of the classes.
2935 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2937 Special Document Classes
2946 \begin_layout Description
2947 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2950 \begin_layout Description
2951 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2955 \begin_layout Description
2956 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2960 \begin_layout Description
2961 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2962 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2963 There are three article layouts available.
2964 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2965 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2966 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2967 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2972 sequential numbering
2973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2976 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2977 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2978 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2979 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2982 \begin_layout Description
2983 Beamer Layout for presentations
2986 \begin_layout Description
2987 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2988 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2989 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2990 with \SpecialChar LyX
2994 \begin_layout Description
2995 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2998 \begin_layout Description
3000 \begin_inset space ~
3003 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Foils Used to make transparencies
3014 \begin_layout Description
3015 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3016 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3017 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3018 with \SpecialChar LyX
3022 \begin_layout Description
3023 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3024 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3027 \begin_layout Description
3028 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3037 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3038 (Is used by this document.)
3041 \begin_layout Description
3042 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3049 \begin_layout Description
3054 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3055 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3057 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3061 \begin_layout Description
3062 Slides Used to make transparencies
3065 \begin_layout Description
3067 \begin_inset space ~
3070 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3071 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3074 \begin_layout Description
3075 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3078 \begin_layout Standard
3079 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3081 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3083 Special Document Classes
3090 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3091 of the document classes.
3094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3098 \begin_layout Standard
3099 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3102 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3104 \begin_inset Index idx
3107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3124 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3125 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3127 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3130 \begin_layout Standard
3133 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3138 , are highly specialized.
3140 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3141 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3142 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3143 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3144 by some document class.
3145 There are just too many of them.
3146 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3149 \begin_layout Standard
3150 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3158 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3159 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3160 document class for a new file.
3162 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3165 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3172 manual for information on how to install them.
3173 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3179 \begin_layout Standard
3180 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3181 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3182 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3183 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3184 class files to be used for dissertation
3185 s submitted to those universities.
3186 The \SpecialChar LyX
3187 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3189 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3193 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3199 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3202 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3204 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3206 name "subsec:Modules"
3211 \begin_inset Index idx
3214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3223 \begin_layout Standard
3224 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3225 chosen document class.
3226 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3227 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3234 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3238 \begin_inset Index idx
3241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3252 \begin_layout Standard
3253 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3254 packages or file format converters that are not always
3255 installed by default.
3257 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3258 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3259 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3260 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3262 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3263 file without the missing prerequisites.
3264 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3265 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3268 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3272 \begin_inset Index idx
3275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3276 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3282 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3290 \begin_layout Standard
3291 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3301 will advise you about these things.
3309 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3313 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3318 \begin_inset Index idx
3321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3322 Document ! Local Layout
3330 \begin_layout Standard
3331 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3332 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3333 : They are intended to be used in
3334 a variety of different documents.
3335 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3336 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3337 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3338 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3339 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3341 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3359 manual for information on how to use it.
3362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3366 \begin_layout Standard
3367 Each class has a default set of options.
3368 Here's a quick table describing them:
3371 \begin_layout Standard
3372 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3378 \begin_layout Standard
3380 \begin_inset Tabular
3381 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3382 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3383 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3384 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3385 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3386 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3387 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 \begin_layout Standard
3842 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3848 \begin_layout Standard
3849 You're probably also wondering what
3850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3854 \begin_inset space ~
3858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3862 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3863 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3868 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3873 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3883 headings, there are also
3891 headings, and so on.
3892 We will describe these headings fully in section
3893 \begin_inset space ~
3897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3899 reference "subsec:Headings"
3906 \begin_layout Subsection
3908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3910 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3915 \begin_inset Index idx
3918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3925 \begin_inset Index idx
3928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3937 \begin_layout Standard
3938 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3940 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3947 \begin_inset space ~
3955 \begin_inset space ~
3960 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3962 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3963 doesn't support special options you want to
3964 use for your document.
3965 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3966 -class and its options, you have to read
3970 \begin_layout Standard
3974 \begin_inset space ~
3981 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3987 \begin_inset space ~
3992 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3993 You can choose between the following five options:
3996 \begin_layout Labeling
3997 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4002 Use default page style of current class.
4005 \begin_layout Labeling
4006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4011 No page numbers or headings.
4014 \begin_layout Labeling
4015 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4029 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4030 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4031 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4032 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4035 \begin_layout Labeling
4036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4041 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4042 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4048 \begin_inset Index idx
4051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4053 -packages ! fancyhdr
4059 How they are defined is explained in section
4060 \begin_inset space ~
4064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4066 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4073 \begin_layout Standard
4074 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4075 \begin_inset space ~
4079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4081 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4088 \begin_layout Subsection
4089 Paper Size and Orientation
4090 \begin_inset Index idx
4093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4094 Document ! Paper size
4100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4102 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4109 \begin_layout Standard
4110 You can find the following options in the menu
4113 \begin_inset space ~
4120 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4124 \begin_inset Index idx
4127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4136 \begin_layout Labeling
4137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4141 \begin_inset space ~
4146 What size paper to print on.
4151 \begin_layout Itemize
4157 \begin_layout Itemize
4163 \begin_layout Itemize
4169 \begin_layout Itemize
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4178 US letter, US legal, US executive
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Labeling
4195 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4200 To choose whether to output as
4211 \begin_layout Labeling
4212 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4216 \begin_inset space ~
4221 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4222 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4225 \begin_layout Subsection
4227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4229 name "subsec:Margins"
4234 \begin_inset Index idx
4237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4244 \begin_inset Index idx
4247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4256 \begin_layout Standard
4257 Paper margins are set in the menu
4259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4263 \begin_inset Index idx
4266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4275 \begin_layout Standard
4276 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4277 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4278 the paper format and the font size into account.
4281 \begin_layout Subsection
4285 \begin_layout Standard
4286 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4292 That includes the paragraph environments.
4293 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4294 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4295 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4297 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4306 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4308 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4309 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4310 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4313 \begin_layout Section
4314 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4315 \begin_inset Index idx
4318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4319 Paragraph ! Indentation
4327 \begin_layout Subsection
4329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4331 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4338 \begin_layout Standard
4339 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4340 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4343 \begin_layout Standard
4344 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4345 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4346 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4347 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4351 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4357 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4358 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4359 language than English.
4361 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4364 \begin_layout Standard
4365 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4366 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4367 into \SpecialChar LyX
4369 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4372 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4374 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4375 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4376 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4383 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4384 goes to produce a printable file.
4389 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4391 gives you the ability globally to change
4395 these pre-coded spacings.
4396 We will explain more later.
4399 \begin_layout Subsection
4400 Paragraph Separation
4401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4403 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4408 \begin_inset Index idx
4411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4412 Paragraph ! Separation
4420 \begin_layout Standard
4428 \begin_inset space ~
4436 \begin_inset space ~
4443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4447 \begin_inset Index idx
4450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4456 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4459 \begin_layout Subsection
4463 \begin_layout Standard
4464 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4467 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4469 \begin_inset space ~
4474 dialog and toggle the
4477 \begin_inset space ~
4482 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4485 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4489 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4490 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4494 \begin_layout Standard
4495 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4496 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4499 \begin_layout Subsection
4501 \begin_inset Index idx
4504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4505 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4520 \begin_inset Index idx
4523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4532 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4536 \begin_inset space ~
4545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4546 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4552 \begin_inset Index idx
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 -packages ! setspace
4562 installed to use this feature.
4567 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4569 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4571 \begin_inset space ~
4576 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4577 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4580 \begin_layout Section
4581 Paragraph Environments
4582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4584 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4589 \begin_inset Index idx
4592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4593 Paragraph ! Environments
4599 \begin_inset Index idx
4602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4603 Paragraph environments|(
4611 \begin_layout Subsection
4615 \begin_layout Standard
4616 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4619 \begin_layout Standard
4628 } \SpecialChar ldots
4638 \begin_inset Newline newline
4641 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4643 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4644 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4645 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4654 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4657 \begin_layout Standard
4658 A paragraph environment is simply a
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4667 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4668 scheme, labels, and so on.
4669 Additionally, you can
4670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4677 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4678 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4679 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4680 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4682 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4684 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4687 \begin_layout Standard
4688 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4689 \begin_inset Graphics
4690 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4696 at the left end of the toolbar.
4698 will change the environment of the
4702 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4703 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4704 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4708 \begin_layout Standard
4717 create a new paragraph using the
4721 paragraph environment.
4723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4730 because if you are in one of these environments:
4733 \begin_layout Itemize
4739 \begin_layout Itemize
4745 \begin_layout Itemize
4751 \begin_layout Itemize
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Standard
4777 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4781 , rather than resetting it to
4786 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4787 \begin_inset space ~
4791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4793 reference "sec:Nesting"
4800 \begin_layout Subsection
4804 \begin_layout Standard
4805 The default paragraph environment is
4810 It creates a plain paragraph.
4812 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4813 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4814 this manual) are in the
4821 \begin_layout Standard
4822 You can nest a paragraph using the
4826 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4834 \begin_layout Subsection
4836 \begin_inset Index idx
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4849 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4850 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4859 for thanks or contact information.
4860 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4861 places all of this on a separate page
4862 along with today's date.
4863 For other types of documents, the title
4864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4871 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4875 \begin_layout Standard
4877 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4891 Here's how you use them:
4894 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 Put the title of your document in the
4902 \begin_layout Itemize
4903 Put the author name in the
4910 \begin_layout Itemize
4911 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4912 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4918 Note that using this environment is optional.
4919 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4920 will automatically insert today's date.
4921 If you don't want a date, use the option
4923 Suppress default date on front page
4927 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4928 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4930 \begin_inset space ~
4938 \begin_layout Standard
4939 You can use footnotes to insert
4940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4947 or contact information.
4950 \begin_layout Subsection
4952 \begin_inset Index idx
4955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4964 name "subsec:Headings"
4971 \begin_layout Standard
4972 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4974 takes care of the numbering for you.
4977 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4979 \begin_inset Index idx
4982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4983 Section headings ! Numbered
4991 \begin_layout Standard
4992 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4996 \begin_layout Enumerate
5002 \begin_layout Enumerate
5008 \begin_layout Enumerate
5014 \begin_layout Enumerate
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Standard
5040 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5041 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5042 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5045 \begin_layout Standard
5046 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5047 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5048 You group the book into chapters.
5050 does a similar grouping:
5053 \begin_layout Itemize
5058 is divided into either
5069 \begin_layout Itemize
5081 \begin_layout Itemize
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Standard
5130 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5138 Not all document types use the
5142 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5147 is the top-level heading.
5155 \begin_layout Standard
5160 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5161 labels it with its number,
5162 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5164 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5176 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5178 \begin_inset Index idx
5181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5182 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5190 \begin_layout Standard
5191 The unnumbered section headings have a
5192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5199 at the end of their name.
5200 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5201 the table of contents, see section
5202 \begin_inset space ~
5206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5215 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5216 Changing the Numbering
5217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5219 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5226 \begin_layout Standard
5227 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5228 in the Table of Contents.
5229 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5231 Just as certain classes start with
5245 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5255 This is something you can change.
5258 \begin_layout Standard
5261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5265 \begin_inset Index idx
5268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5277 \begin_inset space ~
5281 \begin_inset space ~
5286 you will see two counters.
5291 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5292 numbers a section heading.
5293 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5297 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5298 Short Titles of Headings
5299 \begin_inset Index idx
5302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5303 Section headings ! Short titles
5309 \begin_inset Argument 1
5312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5321 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5328 \begin_layout Standard
5329 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5330 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5331 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5332 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5335 \begin_layout Standard
5337 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5338 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5339 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5340 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5345 \begin_inset space ~
5351 This will insert a box labeled
5352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5356 \begin_inset space ~
5360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5363 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5364 This also works for captions inside floats.
5365 There can only be one short title per title.
5368 \begin_layout Standard
5369 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5376 \begin_layout Standard
5377 The following information applies to all section headings:
5380 \begin_layout Itemize
5381 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5384 \begin_layout Itemize
5385 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5388 \begin_layout Itemize
5389 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5392 \begin_layout Itemize
5393 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5396 \begin_layout Subsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5402 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5416 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5417 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5418 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5419 the text they contain.
5420 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5428 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5431 \begin_layout Standard
5432 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5441 when you start a new paragraph.
5442 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5446 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5447 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5448 have to change back to the
5452 environment yourself.
5455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5464 \begin_inset Index idx
5467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5476 \begin_layout Standard
5477 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5478 time for the differences.
5487 are identical except for one difference:
5491 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5500 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5503 \begin_layout Standard
5504 Here's an example of the
5517 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5519 See – no indentation!
5523 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5524 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5525 the other paragraph.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 Here's another example, this time in the
5536 \begin_layout Quotation
5542 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5543 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5544 the first line, then
5548 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5552 you were quoting other text.
5555 \begin_layout Quotation
5556 Here's a new paragraph.
5557 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5558 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5561 \begin_layout Standard
5562 As the examples show,
5566 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5567 They should put quotes in the
5572 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5576 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5579 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5581 \begin_inset Index idx
5584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5591 \begin_inset Index idx
5594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5610 \begin_layout Standard
5615 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5621 \begin_inset Newline newline
5624 Which I did not rehearse!
5628 It could be much worse.
5629 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5631 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5632 indented a bit more than the first.
5633 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5639 \begin_inset Newline newline
5642 And make things look fine
5643 \begin_inset Newline newline
5649 arg "newline-insert newline"
5655 \begin_layout Standard
5660 does not indent both margins.
5661 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5662 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5665 arg "newline-insert newline"
5671 \begin_layout Subsection
5673 \begin_inset Index idx
5676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5692 \begin_layout Standard
5694 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5704 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5705 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5714 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5715 lets you provide your own label.
5716 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5717 describing some general features of all four of them.
5720 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5724 \begin_layout Standard
5725 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5727 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5728 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5737 reset the environment to
5741 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5742 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5743 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5747 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5751 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5758 \begin_layout Standard
5759 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5760 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5761 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5763 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5764 you read all of section
5765 \begin_inset space ~
5769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5771 reference "sec:Nesting"
5778 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5780 \begin_inset Index idx
5783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5799 \begin_layout Standard
5800 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5804 paragraph environment.
5805 It has the following properties:
5808 \begin_layout Itemize
5809 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5813 \begin_layout Itemize
5815 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5824 The items can have any length.
5826 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5827 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5834 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 environment inside another
5843 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5851 \begin_layout Itemize
5853 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5856 \begin_layout Itemize
5858 \begin_inset space ~
5862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5864 reference "sec:Nesting"
5868 for a full explanation of nesting.
5872 \begin_layout Standard
5873 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5882 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5885 \begin_layout Standard
5886 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5887 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5890 \begin_layout Itemize
5891 The label for the first level
5895 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5899 \begin_layout Itemize
5900 The label for the second level is a dash.
5904 \begin_layout Itemize
5905 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5909 \begin_layout Itemize
5910 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 Back out to the third level.
5919 \begin_layout Itemize
5920 Back to the second level.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 Back to the outermost level.
5928 \begin_layout Standard
5929 These are the default labels for an
5934 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5939 dialog in the submenu
5944 \begin_inset Index idx
5947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5953 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5957 \begin_layout Standard
5958 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5959 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5961 \begin_inset space ~
5965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5967 reference "sec:Nesting"
5974 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5976 \begin_inset Index idx
5979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5988 name "sec:Enumerate"
5995 \begin_layout Standard
6000 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6001 It has these properties:
6004 \begin_layout Enumerate
6005 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6009 \begin_layout Enumerate
6010 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6014 \begin_layout Enumerate
6016 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6019 \begin_layout Enumerate
6024 environment resets the counter to one.
6027 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6042 Items can have any length.
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6046 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6049 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6053 \begin_layout Enumerate
6054 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6067 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6069 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6070 labels the four different levels in an
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 The first level of an
6082 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6086 \begin_layout Enumerate
6087 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6091 \begin_layout Enumerate
6092 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6096 \begin_layout Enumerate
6097 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6100 \begin_layout Enumerate
6101 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6106 \begin_layout Enumerate
6107 Back to the third level
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 Back to the second level.
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 Back to the outermost level.
6120 \begin_layout Standard
6121 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6125 environment, see section
6126 \begin_inset space ~
6130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6132 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6137 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6141 \begin_layout Standard
6142 There is more to nesting
6146 environments than we've stated here.
6147 You should read section
6148 \begin_inset space ~
6152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6154 reference "sec:Nesting"
6158 to learn more about nesting.
6161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6163 \begin_inset Index idx
6166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6175 \begin_layout Standard
6176 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6180 list has no fixed label.
6181 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6190 of the first line as the label.
6194 \begin_layout Description
6195 Example: This is an example of the
6202 \begin_layout Standard
6204 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6208 \begin_layout Standard
6210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6217 it is meant that the first usage of the
6221 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6223 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6231 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6237 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6239 \begin_inset space ~
6245 \begin_inset space ~
6249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6251 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6255 for more information.) Here is an example:
6258 \begin_layout Description
6260 \begin_inset space ~
6263 Example: This one shows how to use a
6266 \begin_inset space ~
6278 \begin_layout Description
6279 Usage: You should use the
6283 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6284 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6286 It's not a good idea to use a
6290 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6291 You're better off using
6303 paragraphs into them.
6306 \begin_layout Description
6307 Nesting: You can nest
6311 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6315 \begin_layout Standard
6316 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6317 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6318 them from the first line.
6321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6323 \begin_inset Index idx
6326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6335 \begin_layout Standard
6340 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6341 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6345 \begin_layout Standard
6354 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6356 Here are its properties:
6359 \begin_layout Labeling
6360 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6362 \begin_inset space ~
6365 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6374 of each line as the item label.
6379 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6380 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6381 space as described above.
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6387 uses different margins for the item label and the
6388 body of the item text.
6389 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6390 label width plus a little extra space.
6394 \begin_layout Labeling
6395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6397 \begin_inset space ~
6400 width \SpecialChar LyX
6401 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6402 If the label width is larger, the label
6403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6410 into the first line.
6411 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6412 margin of the rest of the item text.
6415 \begin_layout Labeling
6416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6418 \begin_inset space ~
6421 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6426 environment has the same left margin.
6427 \begin_inset Newline newline
6430 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6435 \begin_inset space ~
6440 dialog (toolbar button
6443 arg "layout-paragraph"
6450 \begin_inset space ~
6455 determines the default label width.
6456 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6465 multiple times instead.
6466 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6476 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6479 \begin_inset space ~
6484 every time you alter a label in a
6489 \begin_inset Newline newline
6492 The predefined default width is the length of
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6501 \begin_inset space ~
6507 \begin_layout Standard
6512 list the same way as the
6516 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6522 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6526 \begin_layout Standard
6531 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6532 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6534 \begin_inset space ~
6538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6540 reference "sec:Nesting"
6544 to learn about nesting.
6547 \begin_layout Standard
6548 There is yet another feature of the
6552 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6553 left-justifies the item labels by
6555 You can use additional
6559 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6560 justifies the item label.
6565 are documented in section
6566 \begin_inset space ~
6570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6572 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6577 Here are some examples:
6580 \begin_layout Labeling
6581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6582 Left The default for
6589 \begin_layout Labeling
6590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6591 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6598 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6601 \begin_layout Labeling
6602 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6603 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6607 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6614 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6617 \begin_layout Subsection
6619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6621 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6626 \begin_inset Index idx
6629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6638 \begin_layout Standard
6639 The features described in this section require that the module
6641 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6643 is loaded in the document settings.
6644 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6655 -packages ! enumitem
6663 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6664 Custom Enumerate Lists
6665 \begin_inset Index idx
6668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6669 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6677 \begin_layout Standard
6679 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6685 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6686 There you add the command
6689 \begin_layout Standard
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6710 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6711 Code, look at section
6712 \begin_inset space ~
6716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6718 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6731 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6738 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6739 For capital Roman numerals replace
6751 in the command above.
6752 For Arabic numerals use
6760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6767 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6782 \begin_layout Standard
6784 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6792 You can only number 26
6793 \begin_inset space ~
6796 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6804 \begin_layout Standard
6805 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6806 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6809 \begin_layout Standard
6810 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6813 \begin_layout Enumerate
6814 \begin_inset Argument 1
6817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6843 \begin_layout Enumerate
6844 \begin_inset Argument 1
6847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6870 \begin_layout Enumerate
6875 \begin_layout Enumerate
6876 \begin_inset Argument 1
6879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6903 \begin_layout Enumerate
6904 \begin_inset Argument 1
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6933 \begin_layout Standard
6934 For this list these commands were used:
6937 \begin_layout Standard
6948 \begin_inset Newline newline
6956 \begin_inset Newline newline
6964 \begin_inset Newline newline
6974 \begin_layout Standard
6981 makes the label emphasized and
6990 \begin_layout Standard
6991 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7000 lists until you change the definition.
7008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7010 \begin_inset Index idx
7013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7014 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7022 \begin_layout Standard
7023 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7026 \begin_layout Enumerate
7027 \begin_inset Argument 1
7030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7049 \begin_inset Note Note
7052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7053 goes back to default numbering
7061 \begin_layout Enumerate
7065 \begin_layout Standard
7069 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7073 \begin_layout Standard
7074 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7079 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7080 to indicate that it is a resumed
7081 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7082 , but in the output.
7085 \begin_layout Standard
7086 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7094 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7103 \begin_layout Standard
7104 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7106 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7107 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7108 of a normal enumeration.
7109 There, insert the command
7112 \begin_layout Standard
7118 \begin_layout Standard
7123 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7127 \begin_layout Enumerate
7131 \begin_layout Enumerate
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7136 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7139 \begin_layout Enumerate
7140 \begin_inset Argument 1
7143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7159 This enumeration starts at 4
7162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7164 \begin_inset Index idx
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7176 \begin_layout Standard
7177 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7179 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7182 \begin_layout Itemize
7186 \begin_layout Itemize
7187 with standard spacing
7190 \begin_layout Standard
7191 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7193 Add there the command
7197 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7200 \begin_layout Itemize
7201 \begin_inset Argument 1
7204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7223 \begin_layout Itemize
7227 \begin_layout Itemize
7231 \begin_layout Standard
7232 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7239 \begin_inset Index idx
7242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7244 -packages ! enumitem
7250 For more information see its documentation,
7251 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7260 \begin_layout Standard
7261 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7263 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7264 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7268 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7271 \begin_layout Enumerate
7272 \begin_inset Argument 1
7275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7283 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 with negative indentation
7300 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7301 Further Customization
7302 \begin_inset Index idx
7305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7306 Lists ! Customization
7314 \begin_layout Standard
7315 You can also change the style of description lists.
7319 \begin_layout Standard
7325 \begin_layout Standard
7326 changes the description label font, the command
7329 \begin_layout Standard
7335 \begin_layout Standard
7336 sets the list style.
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 An example where the command
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7348 itshape, style=nextline
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7355 \begin_layout Description
7357 \begin_inset space ~
7361 \begin_inset Argument 1
7364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7370 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7372 itshape, style=nextline
7382 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7383 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7387 \begin_layout Description
7389 \begin_inset space ~
7392 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7393 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7394 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7397 \begin_layout Standard
7398 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7404 \begin_inset Index idx
7407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7409 -packages ! enumitem
7415 For more information see its documentation
7416 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7425 \begin_layout Subsection
7427 \begin_inset Index idx
7430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7439 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7441 \begin_inset space ~
7444 Address: An Overview
7447 \begin_layout Standard
7448 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7449 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7457 \begin_inset space ~
7463 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7464 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7465 gags on the document.
7466 In contrast, you can use the
7473 \begin_inset space ~
7478 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7479 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7483 \begin_layout Standard
7484 Of course, you're not limited to using
7491 \begin_inset space ~
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7505 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7506 some European academic papers.
7509 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7513 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7520 \begin_layout Standard
7525 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7526 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7530 \begin_inset space ~
7535 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7536 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7537 Here's an example of each:
7540 \begin_layout Right Address
7542 \begin_inset Newline newline
7546 \begin_inset Newline newline
7550 \begin_inset Newline newline
7553 When is it? What is today?
7556 \begin_layout Standard
7560 \begin_inset space ~
7566 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7568 the largest block of text on a single line.
7569 Here's an example of the
7576 \begin_layout Address
7578 \begin_inset Newline newline
7581 Where do I send this
7582 \begin_inset Newline newline
7585 Your post office and country
7588 \begin_layout Standard
7589 As you can see, both
7596 \begin_inset space ~
7601 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7606 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7607 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7613 This makes sense, since
7621 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7622 Thus, you have to use
7629 arg "newline-insert newline"
7634 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7635 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7637 \begin_inset space ~
7641 \begin_inset space ~
7646 ) to start a new line in an
7653 \begin_inset space ~
7661 \begin_layout Subsection
7665 \begin_layout Standard
7666 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7667 or list of references.
7669 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7674 \begin_inset Index idx
7677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7686 \begin_layout Standard
7691 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7692 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7693 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7694 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7708 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7709 The book document classes ignores the
7713 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7717 in a letter document class.
7720 \begin_layout Standard
7725 environment does several things for you.
7726 First, it puts the centered label
7727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7735 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7737 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7738 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7739 the subsequent text.
7740 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7742 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7747 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7751 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7752 The new paragraph will still be in the
7757 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7758 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7761 \begin_layout Standard
7762 \begin_inset Float figure
7767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7769 \begin_inset Graphics
7770 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7778 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7783 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7804 \begin_layout Standard
7805 We would love to demonstrate the
7809 environment, but since this document is in the
7810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7817 class, we can't do this.
7818 We inserted it therefore as figure
7819 \begin_inset space ~
7823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7825 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 If you have never heard of an
7831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7838 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7843 \begin_inset Index idx
7846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7855 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7862 \begin_layout Standard
7867 environment is used to list references.
7868 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7869 only use it at the end of the document.
7881 \begin_layout Standard
7882 When you first open a
7886 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7887 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7903 depending on the document class.
7904 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7905 Each paragraph of the
7909 environment is a bibliography entry.
7914 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7915 Each new paragraph is still in the
7922 \begin_layout Standard
7923 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7924 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7926 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7928 handling, have a look at section
7929 \begin_inset space ~
7933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7935 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7942 \begin_layout Subsection
7943 Special Environments
7946 \begin_layout Standard
7948 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7949 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7957 \begin_inset Index idx
7960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7970 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7977 \begin_layout Standard
7983 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7985 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7990 key as a fixed whitespace.
7994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8007 \begin_inset space ~
8012 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8030 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8033 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8036 arg "newline-insert newline"
8053 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8054 So, when you finish using the
8059 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8060 Also, you can nest the
8065 environment inside of others.
8068 \begin_layout Standard
8069 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8072 \begin_layout Itemize
8076 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8084 \begin_inset space \space{}
8094 arg "newline-insert newline"
8100 \begin_layout Itemize
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8114 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8120 \begin_layout Itemize
8121 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8122 You must put at least one
8126 in any line you want blank.
8127 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8131 \begin_layout Itemize
8132 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8136 since that will insert
8141 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8144 arg "self-insert \""
8150 \begin_layout Standard
8154 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8158 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8162 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8166 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8170 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8171 printf("Hello World!
8176 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout Standard
8185 This is just the standard
8186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8197 \begin_layout Standard
8203 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8205 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8206 as if you used a typewriter.
8207 \begin_inset Index idx
8210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8211 Paragraph environments|)
8216 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8219 Program Code Listings
8224 \begin_inset space ~
8232 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8236 \begin_inset Index idx
8239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8248 \begin_layout Standard
8253 environment is similar to the
8258 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8259 computer console text.
8264 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8278 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8279 you can have empty lines.
8292 \begin_layout Itemize
8293 have a certain language and a text style
8296 \begin_layout Itemize
8297 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8298 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8299 and \SpecialChar TeX
8303 \begin_layout Standard
8304 Because of these properties
8308 works like a typewriter.
8312 \begin_layout Verbatim
8317 \begin_layout Verbatim
8321 The following 2 lines are empty:
8324 \begin_layout Verbatim
8328 \begin_layout Verbatim
8332 \begin_layout Verbatim
8334 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8339 \begin_layout Standard
8344 environment is identical to
8348 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8349 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8356 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8361 \begin_layout Section
8362 Nesting Environments
8363 \begin_inset Index idx
8366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8367 Nesting ! Environments
8373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8382 \begin_layout Subsection
8386 \begin_layout Standard
8388 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8390 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8392 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8394 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8406 \begin_layout Enumerate
8410 \begin_layout Enumerate
8415 \begin_layout Enumerate
8419 \begin_layout Enumerate
8424 \begin_layout Enumerate
8428 \begin_layout Standard
8429 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8430 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8432 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8434 \begin_inset space ~
8438 \begin_inset space ~
8446 \begin_inset space ~
8450 \begin_inset space ~
8455 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8457 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8460 arg "depth-increment"
8466 arg "depth-decrement"
8480 arg "depth-increment"
8486 arg "depth-decrement"
8490 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8491 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8495 \begin_layout Standard
8496 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8497 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8498 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8499 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8500 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8503 \begin_layout Standard
8504 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8506 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8508 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8511 \begin_layout Subsection
8512 What You Can and Can't Nest
8515 \begin_layout Standard
8516 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8517 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8520 \begin_layout Standard
8521 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8522 than a simple yes or no.
8523 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8526 \begin_layout Itemize
8527 Completely unnestable
8530 \begin_layout Itemize
8531 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8535 \begin_layout Itemize
8536 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8540 \begin_layout Standard
8541 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8542 environments have them:
8545 \begin_layout Description
8546 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8547 Can't nest into them.
8551 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 \begin_layout Itemize
8569 \begin_layout Itemize
8575 \begin_layout Itemize
8582 \begin_layout Description
8584 \begin_inset space ~
8587 Nestable You can nest them.
8588 You can nest other things into them.
8592 \begin_layout Itemize
8598 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Itemize
8610 \begin_layout Itemize
8616 \begin_layout Itemize
8622 \begin_layout Itemize
8628 \begin_layout Itemize
8634 \begin_layout Itemize
8641 \begin_layout Itemize
8647 \begin_layout Itemize
8654 \begin_layout Description
8655 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8656 You can't nest anything into them.
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8666 \begin_layout Itemize
8672 \begin_layout Itemize
8678 \begin_layout Itemize
8684 \begin_layout Itemize
8690 \begin_layout Itemize
8696 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 \begin_layout Itemize
8708 \begin_layout Itemize
8714 \begin_layout Itemize
8720 \begin_layout Itemize
8726 \begin_layout Itemize
8732 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_inset space ~
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Standard
8756 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8764 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8774 \begin_inset space ~
8777 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8778 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8779 nested section headings violate this.
8787 \begin_layout Subsection
8788 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8789 \begin_inset Index idx
8792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8793 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8801 \begin_layout Standard
8802 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8803 affected by nesting anyhow.
8807 \begin_layout Itemize
8811 \begin_layout Itemize
8815 \begin_layout Itemize
8819 \begin_layout Standard
8821 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8829 Figures and tables in
8833 are not affected by this.
8838 Have a look at section
8839 \begin_inset space ~
8843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8845 reference "sec:Floats"
8849 for more information about
8856 \begin_layout Standard
8858 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8859 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8863 \begin_layout Standard
8864 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8872 of its own, it behaves just like a
8873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8880 paragraph environment.
8881 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8886 Here's an example with a table:
8889 \begin_layout Enumerate
8894 \begin_layout Enumerate
8895 This is (a) and it's nested.
8899 \begin_layout Standard
8900 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8906 \begin_layout Standard
8908 \begin_inset Tabular
8909 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8910 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8911 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8912 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8996 \begin_layout Standard
8997 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9004 \begin_layout Enumerate
9006 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9010 \begin_layout Enumerate
9014 \begin_layout Standard
9015 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9018 \begin_layout Enumerate
9023 \begin_layout Enumerate
9024 This is (a) and it's nested.
9028 \begin_layout Standard
9029 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9035 \begin_layout Standard
9037 \begin_inset Tabular
9038 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9039 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9040 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9041 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9125 \begin_layout Standard
9126 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9132 \begin_layout Enumerate
9139 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9142 \begin_layout Enumerate
9146 \begin_layout Standard
9147 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9152 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9155 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9163 \begin_layout Enumerate
9164 This is (a) and it's nested.
9167 \begin_layout Standard
9168 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9174 \begin_layout Standard
9176 \begin_inset Tabular
9177 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9178 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9265 \begin_layout Standard
9266 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9272 \begin_layout Enumerate
9274 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9281 \begin_layout Enumerate
9285 \begin_layout Standard
9286 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9292 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9293 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9297 \begin_layout Subsection
9298 Usage and General Features
9301 \begin_layout Standard
9302 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9303 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9312 is the innermost possible depth.
9313 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9316 \begin_layout Enumerate
9317 level #1 – outermost
9321 \begin_layout Enumerate
9326 \begin_layout Enumerate
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 \begin_layout Itemize
9341 \begin_layout Itemize
9350 \begin_layout Standard
9351 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9352 both of them in the example.
9353 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9363 For example, if we tried to nest another
9368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9375 , we would get errors.
9378 \begin_layout Subsection
9380 \begin_inset Index idx
9383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9392 \begin_layout Standard
9393 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9394 We have several examples of nested environments.
9395 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9400 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9403 \begin_layout Labeling
9404 \labelwidthstring MMM
9405 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9414 \begin_layout Labeling
9415 \labelwidthstring MMM
9416 #2-a This is level #2.
9417 We created it by using
9420 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9426 arg "depth-increment"
9433 \begin_layout Labeling
9434 \labelwidthstring MMM
9435 #3-a This is level #3.
9436 This time, we just enter
9443 arg "depth-increment"
9447 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9451 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9457 arg "depth-increment"
9464 \begin_layout Standard
9469 environment, nested inside of
9470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9478 So, it's at level #4.
9479 We did this by entering
9482 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9488 arg "depth-increment"
9491 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9496 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9512 \begin_layout Standard
9517 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9520 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9526 \begin_layout Labeling
9527 \labelwidthstring MMM
9528 #4-a This is level #4.
9532 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9535 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9540 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9544 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9549 keep nesting things inside
9550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9561 \begin_layout Labeling
9562 \labelwidthstring MMM
9563 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9568 \begin_layout Labeling
9569 \labelwidthstring MMM
9570 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9571 and this is level #6.
9572 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9576 \begin_layout Labeling
9577 \labelwidthstring MMM
9578 #5-b Back to level #5.
9582 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9588 arg "depth-decrement"
9595 \begin_layout Labeling
9596 \labelwidthstring MMM
9600 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9606 arg "depth-decrement"
9609 , we're back at level #4.
9613 \begin_layout Labeling
9614 \labelwidthstring MMM
9615 #3-b Back to level #3.
9616 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9620 \begin_layout Labeling
9621 \labelwidthstring MMM
9622 #2-b Back to level #2.
9627 \begin_layout Labeling
9628 \labelwidthstring MMM
9629 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9630 After this sentence, we will enter
9634 and change the paragraph environment back to
9641 \begin_layout Standard
9642 We could have also used the
9658 environment in place of the
9663 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9666 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9667 Example 2: Inheritance
9670 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9671 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9674 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9683 arg "depth-increment"
9687 \begin_inset Newline newline
9690 which, we will change to the
9698 \begin_layout Enumerate
9703 environment, at level #2.
9706 \begin_layout Enumerate
9707 Notice how the nested
9711 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9715 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9719 \begin_layout Standard
9720 We ended this example by entering
9725 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9729 and reset the nesting depth by using
9732 arg "depth-decrement"
9738 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9739 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9748 \begin_inset Argument 1
9751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9752 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9760 \begin_layout Enumerate
9761 This is level #1, in an
9765 paragraph environment.
9766 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9770 \begin_layout Enumerate
9775 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9781 arg "depth-increment"
9785 Now, what happens if we nest an
9789 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9790 label be? An asterisk?
9794 \begin_layout Itemize
9804 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9805 So, its label is a bullet.
9806 (We got here by using
9809 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9815 arg "depth-increment"
9818 , then changing the environment to
9826 \begin_layout Itemize
9827 Here's level #4, produced using
9830 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9836 arg "depth-increment"
9840 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9845 \begin_layout Enumerate
9848 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9853 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9857 , because we are in the
9865 environment (that is, it is an
9880 \begin_layout Enumerate
9885 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9886 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9890 \begin_layout Enumerate
9891 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9894 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9897 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9900 \begin_layout Enumerate
9904 arg "depth-decrement"
9907 to decrease the depth after the next
9910 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9917 \begin_layout Enumerate
9919 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9924 \begin_layout Enumerate
9926 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9927 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9931 \begin_layout Enumerate
9932 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9941 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9946 reset the counter for the label.
9950 \begin_layout Enumerate
9954 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9960 arg "depth-decrement"
9963 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9964 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9965 into the twofold-nested
9973 \begin_layout Enumerate
9974 The same thing happens if we do another
9977 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9983 arg "depth-decrement"
9986 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9989 \begin_layout Standard
9990 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9995 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10006 The number of other
10010 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10017 The same rule applies for the
10021 environment, as well.
10024 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10025 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10028 \begin_layout Enumerate
10029 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10030 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10031 the same detail with how we did it.
10040 \begin_layout Standard
10048 arg "depth-increment"
10055 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10056 the example in parentheses someplace.
10057 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10058 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10059 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10063 \begin_layout Enumerate
10068 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10072 \begin_layout Verse
10073 Now we will add verse.
10074 \begin_inset Newline newline
10077 It will get much worse.
10078 \begin_inset Newline newline
10088 arg "depth-increment"
10098 \begin_layout Verse
10099 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10103 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10104 \begin_inset Newline newline
10110 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10118 \begin_layout Verse
10119 Here comes a table:
10123 \begin_layout Standard
10124 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10130 \begin_layout Standard
10132 \begin_inset Tabular
10133 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10134 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10135 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10136 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10221 \begin_layout Verse
10225 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10235 arg "depth-increment"
10241 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10247 \begin_inset Newline newline
10255 arg "depth-decrement"
10262 \begin_layout Enumerate
10267 : level #1) This is another item.
10268 Note that selecting a
10272 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10273 3 times to put the table inside the
10281 \begin_layout Quotation
10282 We're now ending the
10286 list and changing to
10291 We're still at level #1.
10292 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10293 The next set of paragraphs is a
10294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10301 We will nest both the
10308 \begin_inset space ~
10313 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10317 for the letter body.
10321 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10324 to preserve the depth.
10325 Remember that you need to use
10328 arg "newline-insert newline"
10331 to create multiple lines inside the
10338 \begin_inset space ~
10348 \begin_layout Right Address
10350 \begin_inset Newline newline
10353 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10354 \begin_inset Newline newline
10360 \begin_layout Address
10362 \begin_inset space ~
10368 \begin_layout Quotation
10369 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10373 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10374 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10375 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10376 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10377 as soon as possible.
10378 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10381 \begin_layout Quotation
10382 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10383 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10384 with your order, along with payment.
10387 \begin_layout Quotation
10388 We thank you again for your patience.
10391 \begin_layout Address
10393 \begin_inset Newline newline
10400 \begin_layout Quotation
10401 That ends that example!
10404 \begin_layout Standard
10405 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10406 gives you a lot of power with just
10408 We could have easily nested an
10429 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10432 \begin_layout Subsection
10434 \begin_inset Index idx
10437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10438 Nesting ! Separation
10444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10446 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10453 \begin_layout Standard
10454 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10456 For example you need two different enumerations:
10459 \begin_layout Enumerate
10464 \begin_layout Enumerate
10469 \begin_layout Enumerate
10473 \begin_layout Standard
10474 \begin_inset Separator plain
10480 \begin_layout Itemize
10486 \begin_layout Standard
10487 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10493 \begin_layout Enumerate
10497 \begin_layout Enumerate
10501 \begin_layout Enumerate
10505 \begin_layout Standard
10506 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10507 list item and use the menu
10509 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10510 Start New Environment
10513 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10514 ) and behind it the new list.
10517 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10518 Start New Parent Environment
10520 only appears if the item is nested.
10521 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10525 \begin_layout Standard
10526 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10527 (red arrow in LyX).
10528 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10529 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10532 \begin_layout Standard
10533 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10536 arg "paragraph-break"
10543 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10546 \begin_layout Section
10547 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10548 \begin_inset Index idx
10551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10560 \begin_layout Standard
10561 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10562 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10564 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10565 be broken at the end of a line.
10566 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10570 \begin_layout Subsection
10572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10574 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10579 \begin_inset Index idx
10582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10591 \begin_layout Standard
10592 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10593 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10594 ) not to break the line at
10596 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10599 \begin_layout Quote
10600 Further documentation is given in section
10601 \begin_inset Newline newline
10605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10607 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10615 \begin_layout Standard
10616 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10631 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10640 A protected space is set with
10642 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10643 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10645 \begin_inset space ~
10653 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10659 \begin_layout Subsection
10661 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10663 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10668 \begin_inset Index idx
10671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10672 Spacing ! Horizontal
10680 \begin_layout Standard
10681 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10684 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10688 The length units are listed in Appendix
10689 \begin_inset space ~
10693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10695 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10702 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10706 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10711 \begin_inset Index idx
10714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10715 Spaces ! Inter-word
10723 \begin_layout Standard
10724 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10725 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10726 at the ends of sentences.
10727 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10728 automatically takes care about this.
10729 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10730 followed by a period; see section
10731 \begin_inset space ~
10735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10737 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10742 To insert a normal space, select
10744 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10745 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10747 \begin_inset space ~
10755 arg "space-insert normal"
10761 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10765 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10770 \begin_inset Index idx
10773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10782 \begin_layout Standard
10784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10791 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10800 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10801 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10802 inside abbreviations:
10805 \begin_layout Quote
10807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10811 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10814 \begin_layout Standard
10815 or between values and units.
10816 Compare for example this:
10817 \begin_inset Newline newline
10821 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10825 \begin_inset Newline newline
10828 10 kg (normal space
10831 \begin_layout Standard
10832 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10834 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10835 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10837 \begin_inset space ~
10845 arg "space-insert thin"
10851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10855 \begin_layout Standard
10856 You can also insert the following space types:
10859 \begin_layout Description
10861 \begin_inset space ~
10865 \begin_inset space ~
10868 space A line with a
10869 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10873 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10877 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10880 negative thin space between the arrows.
10883 \begin_layout Description
10885 \begin_inset space ~
10889 \begin_inset space ~
10892 space A line with a
10893 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10897 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10901 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10904 negative medium space between the arrows.
10907 \begin_layout Description
10909 \begin_inset space ~
10913 \begin_inset space ~
10916 space A line with a
10917 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10921 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10925 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10928 negative thick space between the arrows.
10931 \begin_layout Description
10933 \begin_inset space ~
10937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10941 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10945 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10949 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10953 \begin_inset space ~
10957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10960 em) space between the arrows.
10963 \begin_layout Description
10965 \begin_inset space ~
10969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10973 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10977 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10981 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10985 \begin_inset space ~
10989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10992 em) space between the arrows.
10995 \begin_layout Description
10997 \begin_inset space ~
11001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11005 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11009 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11013 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11017 \begin_inset space ~
11021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11024 em) space between the arrows.
11027 \begin_layout Description
11029 \begin_inset space ~
11033 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11037 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11042 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11049 cm space between the arrows.
11052 \begin_layout Standard
11054 \begin_inset space ~
11058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11060 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11064 lists the different space sizes.
11067 \begin_layout Standard
11068 \begin_inset Float table
11073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11074 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11079 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11083 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11093 \begin_inset Tabular
11094 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11095 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11096 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11097 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11213 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11370 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11372 \begin_inset Index idx
11375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11384 \begin_layout Standard
11385 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11386 feature for adding extra space
11387 in a uniform fashion.
11388 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11389 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11390 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11391 equally between themselves.
11394 \begin_layout Standard
11395 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11398 \begin_layout Quote
11400 This is on the left side
11401 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11404 This is on the right
11407 \begin_layout Quote
11410 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11414 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11420 \begin_layout Quote
11423 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11427 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11431 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 \begin_layout Standard
11438 That was an example in the
11444 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11452 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11455 is one in a standard paragraph.
11456 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11460 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11463 \begin_layout Standard
11464 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11467 \begin_inset space ~
11472 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11475 \begin_layout Standard
11477 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11481 \begin_inset space ~
11487 \begin_layout Standard
11489 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11499 \begin_layout Standard
11501 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11505 \begin_inset space ~
11511 \begin_layout Standard
11513 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11523 \begin_layout Standard
11525 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11529 \begin_inset space ~
11535 \begin_layout Standard
11537 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11541 \begin_inset space ~
11547 \begin_layout Standard
11548 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11556 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11560 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11562 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11563 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11567 option in the space dialog.
11575 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11579 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11584 \begin_inset Index idx
11587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11596 \begin_layout Standard
11597 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11598 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11601 \begin_layout Standard
11602 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11605 What is correct English?:
11606 \begin_inset Newline newline
11610 \begin_inset Newline newline
11614 \begin_inset space ~
11617 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11618 \begin_inset Newline newline
11622 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11633 \begin_inset Newline newline
11637 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11648 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11654 \begin_layout Standard
11656 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11661 \begin_inset space ~
11665 \begin_inset space ~
11669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11673 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11676 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11680 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11686 \begin_inset space ~
11690 \begin_inset space ~
11694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11697 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11706 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11707 That is why it is named
11708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11716 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11717 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11721 \begin_layout Subsection
11723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11725 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11730 \begin_inset Index idx
11733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11742 \begin_layout Standard
11743 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11746 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11748 \begin_inset space ~
11754 There you find the following sizes:
11757 \begin_layout Standard
11770 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11771 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11776 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11779 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11781 \begin_inset space ~
11787 \begin_inset Index idx
11790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11791 Document ! Settings
11796 for the paragraph separation.
11797 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11808 \begin_layout Standard
11814 \begin_inset Index idx
11817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11823 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11824 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11829 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11830 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11839 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11848 s are described in section
11849 \begin_inset space ~
11853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11855 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11864 If there are several
11868 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11869 You can therefore use
11873 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11876 \begin_layout Standard
11881 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11882 \begin_inset space ~
11886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11888 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11895 \begin_layout Standard
11896 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11906 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11907 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11919 \begin_layout Subsection
11920 Paragraph Alignment
11921 \begin_inset Index idx
11924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11925 Paragraph ! Alignment
11933 \begin_layout Standard
11934 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11936 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11939 dialog (toolbar button
11942 arg "layout-paragraph"
11946 There are five possibilities:
11949 \begin_layout Itemize
11957 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11963 \begin_layout Itemize
11971 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11977 \begin_layout Itemize
11985 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11991 \begin_layout Itemize
11999 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12005 \begin_layout Itemize
12013 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12019 \begin_layout Standard
12020 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12021 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12022 the left and right margins.
12023 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12026 \begin_layout Standard
12028 This paragraph is right aligned,
12031 \begin_layout Standard
12033 this one is centered,
12036 \begin_layout Standard
12038 this one is left aligned.
12041 \begin_layout Subsection
12043 \begin_inset Index idx
12046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12047 Page breaks ! Forced
12053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12055 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12062 \begin_layout Standard
12063 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12064 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12065 force a page break where you want one.
12066 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12067 is good at page breaking.
12068 Only if you use a lot of
12072 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12073 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12076 \begin_layout Standard
12077 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12078 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12082 have to change the page breaking.
12085 \begin_layout Standard
12086 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12088 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12090 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12091 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12093 \begin_inset space ~
12099 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12101 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12102 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12104 \begin_inset space ~
12109 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12111 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12112 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12115 \begin_layout Standard
12116 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12117 at the top of a page.
12118 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12120 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12121 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12122 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12126 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12130 to learn more about
12137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12141 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12146 \begin_inset Index idx
12149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12150 Page breaks ! Clear
12158 \begin_layout Standard
12159 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12160 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12161 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12162 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12163 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12166 \begin_layout Standard
12167 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12169 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12170 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12172 \begin_inset space ~
12178 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12181 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12183 \begin_inset space ~
12187 \begin_inset space ~
12192 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12193 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12196 \begin_layout Subsection
12198 \begin_inset Index idx
12201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12210 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12217 \begin_layout Standard
12218 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12220 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12223 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12225 \begin_inset space ~
12229 \begin_inset space ~
12237 arg "newline-insert newline"
12241 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12244 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12246 \begin_inset space ~
12250 \begin_inset space ~
12258 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12261 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12263 This is useful to avoid
12264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12271 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12274 \begin_layout Standard
12275 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12276 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12278 very good at line breaking.
12279 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12280 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12281 \begin_inset space ~
12285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12287 reference "sec:Quote"
12292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12294 reference "sec:Verse"
12299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12301 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12308 \begin_layout Subsection
12310 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12312 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12317 \begin_inset Index idx
12320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12329 \begin_layout Standard
12331 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12342 \begin_layout Standard
12346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12347 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12349 \begin_inset space ~
12354 you can insert horizontal lines.
12355 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12356 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12357 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12360 \begin_layout Standard
12362 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12373 \begin_layout Section
12374 Characters and Symbols
12377 \begin_layout Standard
12378 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12379 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12380 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12388 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12392 for information on how this is done.
12395 \begin_layout Standard
12396 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12401 dialog via the menu
12403 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12404 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12410 \begin_layout Standard
12411 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12419 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12420 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12422 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12430 \begin_layout Section
12431 Fonts and Text Styles
12432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12434 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12441 \begin_layout Subsection
12443 \begin_inset Index idx
12446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12455 \begin_layout Standard
12456 There are two types of fonts:
12459 \begin_layout Description
12461 \begin_inset space ~
12465 \begin_inset Index idx
12468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12474 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12479 characters) in the font.
12480 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12481 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12482 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12483 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12484 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12485 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12486 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12487 \begin_inset Newline newline
12490 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12491 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12492 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12493 sizes than at small ones.
12494 \begin_inset Newline newline
12508 \begin_inset space ~
12516 \begin_layout Description
12518 \begin_inset space ~
12522 \begin_inset Index idx
12525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12531 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12532 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12533 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12534 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12535 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12536 image manipulation program.
12537 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12538 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12539 \begin_inset space ~
12542 pixels high up to 34
12543 \begin_inset space ~
12546 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12547 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12548 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12550 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12551 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12552 \begin_inset Newline newline
12555 Bitmap fonts are named
12558 \begin_inset space ~
12563 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12566 \begin_layout Standard
12567 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12568 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12569 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12570 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12571 use scalable fonts.
12574 \begin_layout Standard
12575 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12578 \begin_layout Standard
12579 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12580 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12581 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12582 font to emphasize text, you use an
12583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12591 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12593 In \SpecialChar LyX
12594 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12598 \begin_layout Subsection
12601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12603 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12610 \begin_layout Standard
12611 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12612 used its own fonts.
12613 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12614 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12617 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12618 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12619 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12620 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12621 to a word processor.
12622 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12623 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12624 files are very portable across
12625 different machines.
12626 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12627 has increased a lot
12628 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12631 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12633 \begin_inset space ~
12637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12639 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12644 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12645 code in the document
12646 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12649 \begin_layout Standard
12650 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 engines that are also able directly
12652 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12654 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12656 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12658 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12659 that is installed on your system.
12660 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12663 \begin_layout Standard
12664 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12672 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12673 es; so you might have to experiment.
12681 \begin_layout Subsection
12682 Document Font and Font size
12683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12685 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12690 \begin_inset Index idx
12693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12700 \begin_inset Index idx
12703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12712 \begin_layout Standard
12713 You can set the document fonts in the
12715 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12719 \begin_inset Index idx
12722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12723 Document ! Settings
12733 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12734 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12737 \begin_inset space ~
12746 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12748 \begin_inset space ~
12751 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12754 \begin_layout Standard
12759 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12760 This requires that you use
12772 as the output format, i.
12773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12777 \begin_inset space \space{}
12780 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12781 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12782 installed (see section
12783 \begin_inset space ~
12787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12789 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12794 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12796 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12797 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12799 \begin_inset space ~
12802 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12803 cannot determine the family.
12804 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12805 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12808 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12811 \begin_layout Standard
12812 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12813 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12818 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12824 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12825 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12833 \begin_inset space ~
12839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12852 European Computer Modern
12855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12862 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12865 \begin_layout Standard
12874 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12875 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12880 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12883 \begin_inset space ~
12888 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12894 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12895 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12898 \begin_layout Itemize
12902 \begin_inset space ~
12907 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12920 \begin_inset space ~
12925 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12926 community in order to replace
12930 as the default font.
12931 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12932 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12935 \begin_inset space ~
12948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12949 One difference is improved kerning.
12957 \begin_layout Itemize
12961 \begin_inset space ~
12965 \begin_inset space ~
12970 fonts in (the rare) case that
12973 \begin_inset space ~
12978 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12993 Virtual means that it
12994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13005 -glyphs from other fonts.
13006 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13028 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13034 \begin_inset Index idx
13037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13039 -packages ! aeguill
13044 with the document preamble line
13045 \begin_inset Newline newline
13052 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13053 \begin_inset Newline newline
13058 will fix the guillemet problem.
13063 and that accented characters are not
13067 glyph, but built of
13071 characters, the accent and the letter.
13072 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13078 If you search for example for the French word
13079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13086 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13095 and not for the glyph
13096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13100 \begin_inset space ~
13104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13110 \begin_layout Itemize
13111 If you do not like the look of
13119 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13130 \begin_inset space ~
13140 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13141 \begin_inset space ~
13144 serif and typewriter fonts,
13148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13149 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13156 \begin_inset space ~
13165 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13170 \begin_inset space \space{}
13178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13182 \begin_inset space \space{}
13188 \begin_inset space ~
13196 \begin_inset space ~
13206 but you can also select your own.
13207 \begin_inset Newline newline
13210 The differences between roman,
13213 \begin_inset space ~
13222 fonts are explained in section
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13229 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13234 \begin_inset Newline newline
13240 \begin_inset space ~
13245 was originally designed for newspapers.
13246 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13247 into the small newspaper columns.
13251 \begin_inset space ~
13256 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13259 \begin_layout Standard
13260 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13273 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13278 depends on the class you are using.
13279 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13282 \begin_layout Standard
13283 Note that the font size is the
13288 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13289 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13290 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13291 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13294 \begin_inset space ~
13300 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13301 \begin_inset space ~
13305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13307 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13314 \begin_layout Standard
13318 \begin_inset space ~
13323 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13325 \begin_inset space ~
13328 serif or typewriter.
13333 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13343 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13346 \begin_layout Standard
13351 LaTeX font encoding
13353 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13354 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13360 \begin_inset Index idx
13363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13365 -packages ! fontenc
13371 \begin_inset space ~
13375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13377 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13382 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13383 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13390 \begin_layout Standard
13391 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13393 Use Old Style Figures
13397 Use True Small Caps
13400 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13403 Use Old Style Figures
13405 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13407 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13415 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13419 Use True Small Caps
13421 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13422 of scaled capitals.
13423 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13424 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13427 \begin_layout Standard
13432 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13433 a font to display the script characters.
13437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13438 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13444 \begin_inset Index idx
13447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13454 So this has no effect for the document language
13468 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13472 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13480 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13485 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13486 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13488 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13490 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13493 dialog, see section
13494 \begin_inset space ~
13498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13500 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13512 \begin_layout Subsection
13516 \begin_layout Standard
13517 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13518 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13520 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13521 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13522 choose a math font in the dialog
13524 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13528 \begin_inset Index idx
13531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13532 Document ! Settings
13538 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13539 automatically selects a math font.
13540 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13541 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13550 \begin_inset space ~
13556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13561 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13562 document font is available.
13565 \begin_layout Standard
13566 Note that the math font will not be used for
13570 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13576 or by the insertion of the command
13583 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13584 \begin_inset space ~
13588 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13589 while the math characters do not.
13591 \begin_inset space ~
13594 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13597 \begin_inset space ~
13605 \begin_inset space ~
13610 in the document font settings.
13613 \begin_layout Standard
13614 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13615 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13616 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13617 font (in most cases
13618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13624 \begin_inset space ~
13630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13633 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13634 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13642 \begin_inset space ~
13648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13654 \begin_layout Subsection
13655 Using Different Character Styles
13656 \begin_inset Index idx
13659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13666 \begin_inset Index idx
13669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13678 \begin_layout Standard
13679 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13680 automatically changes the character style for certain
13681 paragraph environments.
13683 supports two character styles,
13692 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13696 \begin_layout Standard
13701 style, do one of the following:
13704 \begin_layout Itemize
13705 click on the toolbar button
13714 \begin_layout Itemize
13715 use the key binding
13724 \begin_layout Standard
13725 These commands are all toggles.
13730 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13733 \begin_layout Standard
13734 One typically uses the
13738 style for proper names.
13740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13747 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13755 \begin_layout Standard
13756 A more widely used character style is the
13761 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13768 \begin_layout Itemize
13769 clicking on the toolbar button
13778 \begin_layout Itemize
13779 using the keybindings
13788 \begin_layout Standard
13793 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13795 use a different font.
13798 \begin_layout Standard
13799 We've been using the
13803 style all over the place in this document.
13804 Here's one more example:
13807 \begin_layout Quotation
13810 Do not overuse character styles!
13813 \begin_layout Standard
13814 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13815 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13816 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13817 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13821 \begin_layout Standard
13822 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13830 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13832 \begin_inset space ~
13835 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13841 arg "dialog-show character"
13847 \begin_layout Subsection
13848 Fine-Tuning with the
13853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13855 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13860 \begin_inset Index idx
13863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13872 \begin_layout Standard
13873 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13875 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13876 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13877 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13878 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13879 from ordinary dialog.
13882 \begin_layout Standard
13883 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13884 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13885 \begin_inset Newline newline
13888 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13889 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13892 \begin_layout Standard
13893 To use custom character styles, open the
13895 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13897 \begin_inset space ~
13900 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13903 dialog or press the toolbar button
13906 arg "dialog-show character"
13910 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13911 font property that you can choose.
13912 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13915 \begin_inset space ~
13920 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13925 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13926 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13927 environments all at once.
13930 \begin_layout Standard
13931 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13934 \begin_inset space ~
13946 \begin_layout Labeling
13947 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13961 The possible options are:
13965 \begin_layout Labeling
13966 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13971 This is the Roman font family.
13972 Normally a serif font.
13973 It's also the default family.
13983 \begin_layout Labeling
13984 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13988 \begin_inset space ~
13995 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14007 \begin_layout Labeling
14008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14015 This is the Typewriter font family.
14021 arg "font-typewriter"
14030 \begin_layout Labeling
14031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14036 This corresponds to the print weight.
14041 \begin_layout Labeling
14042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14047 This is the Medium font series.
14048 It's also the default series.
14051 \begin_layout Labeling
14052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14059 This is the Bold font series.
14072 \begin_layout Labeling
14073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14078 As the name implies.
14083 \begin_layout Labeling
14084 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14089 This is the Upright font shape.
14090 It's also the default shape.
14093 \begin_layout Labeling
14094 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14108 s the Italic font shape
14114 \begin_layout Labeling
14115 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14122 This is the Slanted font shape
14124 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14125 , this is different from italic).
14128 \begin_layout Labeling
14129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14133 \begin_inset space ~
14140 This is the Small caps font shape
14147 \begin_layout Labeling
14148 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14153 Alters the text color.
14154 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14158 \begin_inset space ~
14163 , which means that the document default color set in
14165 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14166 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14172 \begin_inset space ~
14177 is used, you can choose between
14254 \begin_inset Index idx
14257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14266 \begin_layout Labeling
14267 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14272 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14273 the language of the document.
14274 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14275 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14277 \begin_inset Newline newline
14280 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14282 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14283 When using the spell checking (see section
14284 \begin_inset space ~
14288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14290 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14294 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14297 \begin_layout Labeling
14298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14303 Alters the size of the font.
14304 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14305 proportional to the document font size.
14306 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14307 the details, but a general description of what
14313 \begin_layout Labeling
14314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14335 arg "font-size tiny"
14341 \begin_layout Labeling
14342 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14363 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14369 \begin_layout Labeling
14370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14391 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14397 \begin_layout Labeling
14398 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14419 arg "font-size small"
14425 \begin_layout Labeling
14426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14440 It's also the default size.
14444 arg "font-size normal"
14450 \begin_layout Labeling
14451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14472 arg "font-size large"
14478 \begin_layout Labeling
14479 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14500 arg "font-size larger"
14506 \begin_layout Labeling
14507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14528 arg "font-size largest"
14534 \begin_layout Labeling
14535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14556 arg "font-size huge"
14562 \begin_layout Labeling
14563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14584 arg "font-size giant"
14590 \begin_layout Labeling
14591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14596 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14616 arg "font-size increase"
14622 \begin_layout Labeling
14623 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14628 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14648 arg "font-size decrease"
14655 \begin_layout Standard
14660 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14661 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14663 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14664 — use those instead.
14665 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14668 \begin_layout Labeling
14669 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14674 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14679 \begin_layout Labeling
14680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14687 This is text with emphasize on
14690 This might seem like the same as
14694 , but it is actually a bit different.
14700 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14702 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14705 \begin_layout Labeling
14706 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14713 This is text with Underbar on.
14719 arg "font-underline"
14725 \begin_inset Newline newline
14730 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14731 when you could not change fonts.
14732 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14733 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14734 because some people
14738 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14741 \begin_layout Labeling
14742 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14746 \begin_inset space ~
14753 This is text with Double underbar on.
14759 arg "font-underunderline"
14763 \begin_inset Newline newline
14766 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14767 about double underbar.
14770 \begin_layout Labeling
14771 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14775 \begin_inset space ~
14782 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14788 arg "font-underwave"
14792 \begin_inset Newline newline
14795 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14796 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14799 \begin_layout Labeling
14800 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14807 This is text with Strikeout on.
14813 arg "font-strikeout"
14817 \begin_inset Newline newline
14820 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14821 changed in the meantime.
14824 \begin_layout Labeling
14825 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14832 This is text with Noun on.
14839 , this is a logical attribute.
14840 Normally it's equivalent to
14843 \begin_inset space ~
14852 \begin_layout Standard
14853 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14854 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14856 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14858 \begin_inset space ~
14861 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14867 arg "dialog-show character"
14870 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14871 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14874 arg "textstyle-apply"
14878 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14882 \begin_layout Standard
14883 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14890 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14891 (suppose you just set the shape to
14892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 \begin_inset space ~
14922 \begin_layout Standard
14923 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14931 \begin_inset space ~
14943 \begin_layout Itemize
14949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14956 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14974 \begin_inset Newline newline
14978 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14992 \begin_inset Note Note
14995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14996 For more on phantoms see section
14997 \begin_inset space ~
15001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15003 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15013 \begin_inset Newline newline
15019 \begin_layout Itemize
15024 fonts use characters with serifs.
15025 These are the small
15026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15033 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15034 The following example shows the difference:
15035 \begin_inset Newline newline
15039 \begin_inset Newline newline
15044 text without serifs
15047 \begin_inset Newline newline
15050 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15051 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15058 \begin_layout Itemize
15063 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15064 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15065 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15068 \begin_layout Standard
15069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15076 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15077 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15080 \begin_inset space ~
15085 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15086 the property to be removed.
15087 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15088 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15089 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15107 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15108 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15116 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15120 \begin_inset space ~
15125 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15136 If you, for example, set
15137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15155 \begin_inset space ~
15160 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15169 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15172 \begin_layout Standard
15173 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15174 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15177 \begin_layout Section
15178 Printing and Previewing
15181 \begin_layout Subsection
15185 \begin_layout Standard
15186 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15187 using \SpecialChar LyX
15188 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15189 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15190 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15191 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15193 Additional Features
15198 \begin_layout Standard
15200 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15203 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15204 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15205 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15208 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15209 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15210 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15211 to turn your writing into printable output.
15212 This happens in two stages:
15215 \begin_layout Enumerate
15216 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15217 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15219 a file with the extension,
15220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15234 \begin_layout Enumerate
15235 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15236 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15237 to use the commands in the
15241 file to produce printable output.
15244 \begin_layout Subsection
15245 Output file formats
15246 \begin_inset Index idx
15249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15258 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15266 Simple text (ASCII)
15267 \begin_inset Index idx
15270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15271 File formats ! ASCII
15279 \begin_layout Standard
15280 This file type has the extension
15281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15293 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15297 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15304 \begin_layout Standard
15305 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15307 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15308 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15310 \begin_inset space ~
15316 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15317 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15318 bibliography (section
15319 \begin_inset space ~
15323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15325 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15330 If your document includes such material, use
15332 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15333 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15335 \begin_inset space ~
15339 \begin_inset space ~
15343 \begin_inset space ~
15351 \begin_inset space ~
15355 \begin_inset space ~
15361 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15362 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15365 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15368 \begin_inset Index idx
15371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15372 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15381 \begin_layout Standard
15382 This file type has the extension
15383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15394 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15397 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15398 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15399 -Errors or to process it manually
15400 with console commands.
15401 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15402 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15403 's temporary directory whenever you
15404 view or export your document.
15407 \begin_layout Standard
15408 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15409 -file using the menu
15411 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15412 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15416 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15417 export variants are explained in section
15418 \begin_inset space ~
15422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15424 reference "subsec:Export"
15431 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15433 \begin_inset Index idx
15436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15445 \begin_layout Standard
15446 This file type has the extension
15447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15467 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15468 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15469 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15473 \begin_layout Standard
15474 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15475 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15476 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15477 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15478 when you view the DVI.
15479 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15482 \begin_layout Standard
15483 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15485 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15486 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15491 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15492 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15494 \begin_inset space ~
15500 The latter option uses the program
15502 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15508 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15511 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15512 font access (see section
15513 \begin_inset space ~
15517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15519 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15524 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15525 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15532 \begin_inset Index idx
15535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15536 File formats ! PostScript
15544 \begin_layout Standard
15545 This file type has the extension
15546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15558 PostScript was developed by the company
15562 as a printer language.
15563 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15565 PostScript can be seen as a
15566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15569 programming language
15570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15573 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15578 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15585 \begin_inset Index idx
15588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15590 -packages ! pstricks
15600 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15603 \begin_layout Standard
15604 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15608 Encapsulated PostScript
15609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15612 (EPS, file extension
15613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15625 As \SpecialChar LyX
15626 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15627 convert them in the background to EPS.
15628 If, for example, you have 50
15629 \begin_inset space ~
15632 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15634 \begin_inset space ~
15637 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15638 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15640 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15641 EPS to avoid this problem.
15644 \begin_layout Standard
15645 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15647 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15648 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15654 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15656 \begin_inset Index idx
15659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15666 \begin_inset Index idx
15669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15678 \begin_layout Standard
15679 This file type has the extension
15680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15696 Portable Document Format
15697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15704 was derived from PostScript.
15705 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15714 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15715 looks exactly the same.
15718 \begin_layout Standard
15719 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15723 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15727 (JPG, file extension
15728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15755 Portable Network Graphics
15756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15759 (PNG, file extension
15760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15772 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15773 converts them in the
15774 background to one of these formats.
15775 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15776 will slow down your workflow.
15777 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15780 \begin_layout Standard
15781 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15783 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15789 \begin_layout Description
15791 \begin_inset space ~
15794 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15798 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15801 \begin_layout Description
15803 \begin_inset space ~
15810 ) This uses the program
15812 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15815 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15818 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15821 is a new engine, derived from
15825 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15826 access (see section
15827 \begin_inset space ~
15831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15833 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15838 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15839 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15844 \begin_layout Description
15846 \begin_inset space ~
15853 ) This uses the program
15858 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15864 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15865 font access (see section
15866 \begin_inset space ~
15870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15872 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15877 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15878 vertically written Japanese.
15881 \begin_layout Description
15883 \begin_inset space ~
15886 (cropped) This is the same as
15889 \begin_inset space ~
15894 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15895 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15896 to generate good-looking
15897 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15900 \begin_layout Description
15902 \begin_inset space ~
15905 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15909 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15913 \begin_layout Description
15915 \begin_inset space ~
15918 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15922 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15923 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15927 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15928 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15931 \begin_layout Standard
15935 \begin_inset space ~
15944 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15945 works without problems.
15946 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15947 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15951 \begin_inset space ~
15959 \begin_inset space ~
15964 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15972 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15974 \begin_inset Index idx
15977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15978 FileFormats ! XHTML
15984 \begin_inset Index idx
15987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15996 \begin_layout Standard
15997 This file type has the extension
15998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16010 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16011 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16012 When \SpecialChar LyX
16013 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16014 suitable for the purpose.
16015 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16018 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16021 between different formats, which are described in section
16023 Math Output in XHTML
16028 \begin_inset space ~
16036 \begin_layout Standard
16037 XHTML output remains
16038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16045 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16046 features are supported yet.
16050 and the World Wide Web
16054 Additional Features
16056 manual, for more information.
16059 \begin_layout Standard
16060 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16062 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16063 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16069 \begin_layout Subsection
16071 \begin_inset Index idx
16074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16083 \begin_layout Standard
16084 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16085 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16094 or use the toolbar button
16101 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16102 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16103 \begin_inset space ~
16107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16109 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16113 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16115 \begin_inset space ~
16119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16121 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16126 Further output formats can be selected via
16128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16129 View (Other Formats)
16131 or the toolbar button
16140 \begin_layout Standard
16141 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16142 viewer window using the menu
16144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16149 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16150 Update (Other Formats)
16155 \begin_layout Standard
16156 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16159 To have a real output, export your document.
16162 \begin_layout Section
16163 A few Words about Typography
16164 \begin_inset Index idx
16167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16176 \begin_layout Subsection
16177 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16178 \begin_inset Index idx
16181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16188 \begin_inset Index idx
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16200 \begin_layout Standard
16201 In \SpecialChar LyX
16203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16214 character comes in four lengths: the
16226 , and the minus sign:
16227 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16233 \begin_layout Standard
16234 \begin_inset Tabular
16235 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16236 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16237 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16238 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16239 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16240 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16269 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16309 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16334 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16336 \begin_inset space ~
16339 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16346 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16371 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16373 \begin_inset space ~
16376 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16397 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16431 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16437 \begin_layout Standard
16438 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16450 character multiple times in a row.
16451 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16452 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16485 \begin_layout Standard
16486 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16487 math mode and has a length of its own.
16488 Here are some examples:
16491 \begin_layout Enumerate
16492 line- and page-breaks
16493 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16503 \begin_layout Enumerate
16505 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16515 \begin_layout Enumerate
16516 Oh — there's a dash.
16517 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16527 \begin_layout Enumerate
16528 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16532 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16542 \begin_layout Subsection
16544 \begin_inset Index idx
16547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16556 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16563 \begin_layout Standard
16564 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16565 but automatically in the output.
16566 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16572 \begin_inset Index idx
16575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16582 following the rules of the document language.
16585 \begin_layout Standard
16587 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16591 font and with unusual constructs, like
16592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16600 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16601 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16602 This is done with the menu
16604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16605 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16607 \begin_inset space ~
16613 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16615 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16619 \begin_layout Standard
16620 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16621 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16632 would then see the hyphen
16633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16640 as a hyphenation possibility.
16641 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16642 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16643 as described in section
16645 Prevent Hyphenation
16650 \begin_inset space ~
16658 \begin_layout Subsection
16660 \begin_inset Index idx
16663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16673 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16676 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16683 \begin_layout Standard
16684 When \SpecialChar LyX
16685 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16686 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16688 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16694 appropriate amount of space.
16695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16698 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16700 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16701 gets after another word.
16704 \begin_layout Standard
16705 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16706 not work in all cases.
16708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16719 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16720 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16723 \begin_layout Standard
16724 Here are some examples of
16728 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16731 \begin_layout Itemize
16736 \begin_layout Itemize
16741 \begin_layout Standard
16742 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16745 \begin_layout Itemize
16747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16751 this is too much space!
16754 \begin_layout Itemize
16759 \begin_layout Standard
16760 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16763 \begin_layout Standard
16764 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16767 \begin_layout Enumerate
16771 \begin_inset space ~
16776 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16777 \begin_inset space ~
16781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16783 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16788 \begin_inset Index idx
16791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16792 Spaces ! inter-word
16800 \begin_layout Enumerate
16804 \begin_inset space ~
16809 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16810 \begin_inset space ~
16814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16816 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16821 \begin_inset Index idx
16824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16833 \begin_layout Enumerate
16837 \begin_inset space ~
16841 \begin_inset space ~
16845 \begin_inset space ~
16852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16854 \begin_inset space ~
16859 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16860 This function is also bound to
16863 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16869 \begin_layout Standard
16870 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16873 \begin_layout Itemize
16875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16879 \begin_inset space \space{}
16882 this is too much space!
16885 \begin_layout Itemize
16886 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16890 \begin_layout Standard
16891 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16892 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16894 will take care of this.
16897 \begin_layout Standard
16898 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16902 \begin_inset space ~
16908 feature described in the section
16910 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16915 Additional Features
16920 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16922 \begin_inset Index idx
16925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16926 Typography ! Quotes
16932 \begin_inset Index idx
16935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16966 \begin_layout Standard
16968 usually sets quotes correctly.
16969 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16970 and use a closing quote at the end.
16972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16980 The keyboard character,
16984 , generates this automatically.
16987 \begin_layout Standard
16988 You can specify what character the
16992 key produces using the submenu
16998 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17002 \begin_inset Index idx
17005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17006 Document ! Settings
17016 There are six choices:
17019 \begin_layout Labeling
17020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17043 \begin_layout Labeling
17044 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17047 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17051 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17056 Use quotes like ”this”
17059 \begin_layout Labeling
17060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17063 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17067 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17073 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17077 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17083 \begin_layout Labeling
17084 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17087 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17091 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17097 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17101 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17107 \begin_layout Labeling
17108 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17111 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17115 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17121 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17125 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17131 \begin_layout Labeling
17132 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17135 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17139 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17145 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17149 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17155 \begin_layout Standard
17156 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17159 arg "quote-insert single"
17165 \begin_layout Subsection
17167 \begin_inset Index idx
17170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17171 Typography ! Ligatures
17177 \begin_inset Index idx
17180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17211 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17218 \begin_layout Standard
17219 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17220 print them as single characters.
17221 These groups are known as
17226 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17227 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17229 Here are the standard ligatures:
17232 \begin_layout Itemize
17236 \begin_layout Itemize
17240 \begin_layout Itemize
17244 \begin_layout Itemize
17248 \begin_layout Itemize
17252 \begin_layout Standard
17253 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17256 \begin_layout Standard
17257 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17258 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17266 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17282 To break a ligature, use
17284 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17285 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17287 \begin_inset space ~
17294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17305 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17322 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17330 \begin_layout Subsection
17332 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17334 \begin_inset Index idx
17337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17347 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17354 \begin_layout Standard
17357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17358 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17362 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17365 \begin_layout Description
17367 The name of the game.
17370 \begin_layout Description
17372 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17376 \begin_layout Description
17378 The \SpecialChar TeX
17379 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17383 \begin_layout Description
17384 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17385 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17389 \begin_layout Standard
17390 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17396 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17404 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17405 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17406 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17407 converges to the number
17408 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17411 : The actual version is
17412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17420 , the previous one was
17421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17432 \begin_layout Subsection
17434 \begin_inset Index idx
17437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17446 \begin_layout Standard
17447 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17448 space between two words.
17449 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17459 for units use the menu
17461 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17462 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17464 \begin_inset space ~
17472 arg "space-insert thin"
17478 \begin_layout Standard
17479 Here is an example to show the differences:
17482 \begin_layout Standard
17483 \begin_inset Tabular
17484 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17485 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17486 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17487 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17494 \begin_inset space ~
17498 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17510 space between number and unit
17517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17526 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17538 half space between number and unit
17551 \begin_layout Subsection
17553 \begin_inset Index idx
17556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17557 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17565 \begin_layout Standard
17566 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17568 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17569 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17570 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17571 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17572 These bits of text became known as
17583 \begin_layout Standard
17584 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17585 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17586 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17587 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17588 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17589 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17590 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17591 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17592 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17593 \begin_inset Newline newline
17601 \begin_inset Newline newline
17609 \begin_inset Newline newline
17612 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17613 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17614 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17616 \begin_inset space ~
17620 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17622 key "latexcompanion"
17627 \begin_inset space ~
17631 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17637 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17638 's page break mechanism.
17641 \begin_layout Chapter
17642 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17645 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17652 \begin_layout Standard
17653 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17656 \begin_inset space ~
17662 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17665 \begin_layout Section
17667 \begin_inset Index idx
17670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17686 \begin_layout Standard
17688 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17691 \begin_layout Description
17694 \begin_inset space ~
17697 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17698 \begin_inset Newline newline
17702 \begin_inset Note Note
17705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17706 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17714 \begin_layout Description
17715 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17716 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17717 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17720 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17721 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17723 \begin_inset space ~
17729 \begin_inset Newline newline
17733 \begin_inset Note Comment
17736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17737 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17746 \begin_layout Description
17748 \begin_inset space ~
17751 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17752 set in the document settings under
17754 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17756 \begin_inset space ~
17762 \begin_inset Newline newline
17766 \begin_inset Newline newline
17770 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17779 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17780 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17785 of a comment that appears in the output.
17791 \begin_inset Newline newline
17795 \begin_inset Newline newline
17798 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17801 \begin_layout Standard
17802 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17810 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17814 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17817 \begin_layout Section
17819 \begin_inset Index idx
17822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17831 name "sec:Footnotes"
17838 \begin_layout Standard
17840 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17843 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17846 or the toolbar button
17849 arg "footnote-insert"
17861 \begin_inset Graphics
17862 filename clipart/footnote.png
17871 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17872 's representation of your footnote.
17882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17901 label, the box will
17905 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17906 Clicking on the box label again will close
17919 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17920 and click on the footnote
17935 \begin_layout Standard
17936 Here is an example footnote:
17944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17945 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17953 \begin_layout Standard
17954 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17955 position where the footnote box is placed.
17956 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17957 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17958 according to the document class.
17960 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17961 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17967 ey are described in the
17970 \begin_inset space ~
17978 \begin_layout Section
17980 \begin_inset Index idx
17983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17992 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17999 \begin_layout Standard
18000 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18002 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18006 \begin_inset space ~
18011 or the toolbar button
18014 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18040 appearing within your text.
18041 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18042 's representation of your margin
18051 \begin_layout Standard
18052 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18056 \begin_inset Marginal
18059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18061 This is a marginal note.
18069 \begin_layout Standard
18070 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18071 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18072 pages, right on odd pages.
18075 \begin_layout Standard
18076 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18079 \begin_inset space ~
18087 \begin_inset space ~
18095 \begin_layout Section
18096 Graphics and Images
18097 \begin_inset Index idx
18100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18107 \begin_inset Index idx
18110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18119 name "sec:Graphics"
18126 \begin_layout Standard
18127 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18128 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18131 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18136 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18140 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18143 \begin_layout Standard
18144 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18149 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18150 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18152 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18153 \begin_inset space ~
18157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18159 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18166 \begin_layout Standard
18171 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18172 of the image in the output.
18173 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18177 \begin_inset space ~
18181 \begin_inset space ~
18190 \begin_inset space ~
18194 \begin_inset space ~
18198 \begin_inset space ~
18203 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18204 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18212 \begin_layout Standard
18216 \begin_inset space ~
18220 \begin_inset space ~
18225 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18226 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18228 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18233 \begin_inset space ~
18238 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18239 with the image size is printed.
18242 \begin_layout Standard
18243 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18244 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18246 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18249 \begin_layout Standard
18251 \begin_inset Graphics
18252 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18260 \begin_layout Standard
18261 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18262 the image into a float, see section
18263 \begin_inset space ~
18267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18269 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18276 \begin_layout Subsection
18278 \begin_inset Index idx
18281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18290 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18297 \begin_layout Standard
18298 You can insert images in any known file format.
18299 But as we explained in section
18300 \begin_inset space ~
18304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18306 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18310 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18312 therefore uses the program
18316 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18317 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18318 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18319 \begin_inset space ~
18323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18325 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18332 \begin_layout Standard
18333 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18336 \begin_layout Description
18338 \begin_inset space ~
18341 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18342 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18343 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18347 Graphics Interchange Format
18348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18351 (GIF, file extension
18352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18364 \begin_inset Index idx
18367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18399 Portable Network Graphics
18400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18403 (PNG, file extension
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18416 \begin_inset Index idx
18419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18451 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18455 (JPG, file extension
18456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18480 \begin_inset Index idx
18483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18514 \begin_layout Description
18516 \begin_inset space ~
18519 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18521 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18522 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18523 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18524 \begin_inset Newline newline
18527 Scalable image formats can be
18528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18531 Scalable Vector Graphics
18532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18535 (SVG, file extension
18536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18548 \begin_inset Index idx
18551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18583 Encapsulated PostScript
18584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18587 (EPS, file extension
18588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18600 \begin_inset Index idx
18603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18635 Portable Document Format
18636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18639 (PDF, file extension
18640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18652 \begin_inset Index idx
18655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18670 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18671 result will not be scalable.
18672 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18678 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18686 \begin_layout Standard
18687 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18694 \begin_layout Subsection
18695 Grouping of Image Settings
18696 \begin_inset Index idx
18699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18700 Images ! Settings grouping
18708 \begin_layout Standard
18709 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18711 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18712 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18714 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18715 need to manually change each of them.
18719 \begin_layout Standard
18720 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18723 \begin_inset space ~
18727 \begin_inset space ~
18739 \begin_inset space ~
18743 \begin_inset space ~
18749 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18750 and checking the name of the desired group.
18753 \begin_layout Section
18755 \begin_inset Index idx
18758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18774 \begin_layout Standard
18775 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18778 arg "tabular-insert"
18783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18787 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18788 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18789 from the rest of the table.
18790 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18791 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18793 Here is an example table:
18796 \begin_layout Standard
18798 \begin_inset Tabular
18799 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18800 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18801 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18802 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18803 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18804 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19004 \begin_layout Subsection
19008 \begin_layout Standard
19009 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19012 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19016 This brings up the table dialog.
19017 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19018 cursor is placed currently.
19019 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19020 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19021 done on all of your selection.
19024 \begin_layout Standard
19025 In addition to the table dialog, the
19028 \begin_inset space ~
19033 helps you in setting table properties.
19034 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19037 \begin_layout Standard
19041 \begin_inset space ~
19046 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19047 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19048 current cell respectively.
19049 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19051 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19052 of text, see section
19053 \begin_inset space ~
19057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19059 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19066 \begin_layout Standard
19067 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19068 using the check box
19077 This will merge the cells to
19081 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19082 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19083 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19084 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19085 in the last row without the upper border:
19088 \begin_layout Standard
19090 \begin_inset Tabular
19091 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19092 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19093 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19094 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19095 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19096 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19107 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19116 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19192 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19227 \begin_layout Standard
19228 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19229 -arguments for the table.
19230 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19231 explained in the chapter
19238 \begin_inset space ~
19244 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19245 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19246 but are visible in the output.
19249 \begin_layout Standard
19250 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19258 Most DVI-viewers are
19262 able to display rotations.
19270 \begin_layout Standard
19275 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19280 adds lines for all cell borders.
19283 \begin_layout Subsection
19285 \begin_inset Index idx
19288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19289 Tables ! Multi-page
19295 \begin_inset Index idx
19298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19307 \begin_layout Standard
19308 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19311 \begin_inset space ~
19315 \begin_inset space ~
19323 \begin_inset space ~
19328 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19329 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19332 \begin_layout Description
19337 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19338 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19339 except for the first page, if
19342 \begin_inset space ~
19350 \begin_layout Description
19354 \begin_inset space ~
19359 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19360 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19363 \begin_layout Description
19368 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19369 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19370 except for the last page, if
19373 \begin_inset space ~
19381 \begin_layout Description
19385 \begin_inset space ~
19390 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19391 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19394 \begin_layout Description
19395 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19396 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19398 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19402 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
19405 \begin_inset space ~
19413 \begin_layout Standard
19414 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19415 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19416 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19422 In this context, first means first in this order:
19425 \begin_inset space ~
19437 \begin_inset space ~
19442 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19445 \begin_layout Standard
19447 \begin_inset Tabular
19448 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19449 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19450 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19451 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19452 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19453 <row endfirsthead="true">
19454 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19460 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19465 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19474 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19484 <row endfirsthead="true">
19485 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19496 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19505 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19517 <row endhead="true">
19518 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19529 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19538 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19548 <row endhead="true">
19549 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19560 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19569 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19581 <row endfoot="true">
19582 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19593 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19602 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19633 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20574 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20583 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20592 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20603 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20634 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20665 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20696 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20727 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20758 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20789 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20820 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20851 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20882 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20913 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20944 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20975 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21006 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21037 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21068 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21099 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21130 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21161 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21192 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21223 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21254 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21285 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21316 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21347 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21378 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21409 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21440 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21471 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21502 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21533 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21563 <row endlastfoot="true">
21564 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21575 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21584 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21601 \begin_layout Subsection
21603 \begin_inset Index idx
21606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21615 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21622 \begin_layout Standard
21623 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21624 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21625 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21626 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21630 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21633 \begin_layout Standard
21634 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21635 for the column in the table dialog.
21636 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21637 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21641 \begin_layout Standard
21643 \begin_inset Tabular
21644 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21645 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21646 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21647 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21648 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21668 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21737 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21793 This is longer now.
21798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21849 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21850 This is longer now.
21855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21881 \begin_layout Standard
21882 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21883 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21889 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21895 Selection with the mouse or with
21899 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21900 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21901 the selection from outside the table.
21904 \begin_layout Section
21906 \begin_inset Index idx
21909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21925 \begin_layout Subsection
21929 \begin_layout Standard
21930 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21931 have a fixed location.
21933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21940 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21948 \begin_inset space ~
21953 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21954 too many notes on the current page.
21957 \begin_layout Standard
21958 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21959 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21960 and pages without text.
21961 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21962 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21963 Floats are therefore numbered.
21964 Referencing is described in section
21965 \begin_inset space ~
21969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21971 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21978 \begin_layout Standard
21979 To insert a float, use the menu
21981 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21985 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21986 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21988 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21989 \begin_inset Index idx
21992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21998 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21999 paragraph within the float.
22000 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22001 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22002 left-clicking on the box label.
22003 A closed float box looks like this:
22004 \begin_inset Graphics
22005 filename clipart/float.png
22010 – a gray button with a red label.
22013 \begin_layout Standard
22014 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22016 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22019 \begin_layout Subsection
22021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22023 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22028 \begin_inset Index idx
22031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22032 Floats ! Figure floats
22040 \begin_layout Standard
22042 \begin_inset space ~
22046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22048 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22052 was created using the menu
22054 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22055 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22061 arg "float-insert figure"
22065 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22068 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22074 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22078 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22079 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22081 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22083 \begin_inset space ~
22091 arg "layout-paragraph"
22097 \begin_layout Standard
22098 \begin_inset Float figure
22103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22105 \begin_inset Graphics
22106 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22116 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22121 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22125 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22138 \begin_layout Standard
22139 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22140 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22151 ) and refer to it using the menu
22153 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22159 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22163 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22164 vague references like
22165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22172 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22173 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22183 For more about cross-references, see section
22184 \begin_inset space ~
22188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22190 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22197 \begin_layout Standard
22198 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22199 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22200 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22201 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22202 as described in section
22203 \begin_inset space ~
22207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22209 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22215 \begin_inset space ~
22219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22221 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22225 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22226 You can also set the images one below the other.
22228 \begin_inset space ~
22232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22234 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22241 reference "fig:Platypus"
22245 are the subfigures.
22248 \begin_layout Standard
22249 \begin_inset Float figure
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22255 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22259 \begin_inset Float figure
22264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22265 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22270 name "fig:Undefinable"
22282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 \begin_inset Graphics
22284 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22295 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22299 \begin_inset Float figure
22304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22305 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22310 name "fig:Platypus"
22322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22323 \begin_inset Graphics
22324 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22336 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22343 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22348 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22352 Two distorted images.
22365 \begin_layout Subsection
22367 \begin_inset Index idx
22370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22371 Floats ! Table floats
22379 \begin_layout Standard
22380 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22382 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22383 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22386 or the toolbar button
22389 arg "float-insert table"
22393 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22394 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22395 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22397 \begin_inset space ~
22401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22403 reference "tab:Table-float"
22410 \begin_layout Standard
22411 \begin_inset Float table
22416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22417 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22422 name "tab:Table-float"
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22436 \begin_inset Tabular
22437 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22438 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22439 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22440 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22441 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22568 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22589 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22592 \end{array}\right]$
22600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22613 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22634 \begin_layout Subsection
22636 \begin_inset Index idx
22639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22648 \begin_layout Standard
22650 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22651 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22652 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22654 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22662 \begin_inset space ~
22670 \begin_layout Section
22672 \begin_inset Index idx
22675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22684 \begin_layout Standard
22686 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22688 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22689 \begin_inset space \space{}
22696 \begin_layout Standard
22697 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22698 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22704 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22705 and its alignment within the page.
22708 \begin_layout Standard
22710 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22720 height_special "totalheight"
22725 backgroundcolor "none"
22728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22731 This is a minipage.
22732 The text is set in an italic style.
22735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22738 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22739 another formatting.
22747 \begin_layout Standard
22748 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22751 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22755 as described in section
22756 \begin_inset space ~
22760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22762 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22767 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22773 \begin_layout Standard
22774 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22784 height_special "totalheight"
22789 backgroundcolor "none"
22792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22793 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22794 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22800 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22804 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22814 height_special "totalheight"
22819 backgroundcolor "none"
22822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22823 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22824 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22832 \begin_layout Standard
22833 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22839 \begin_layout Standard
22840 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22842 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22849 \begin_inset space ~
22857 \begin_layout Chapter
22858 Mathematical Formulas
22859 \begin_inset Index idx
22862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22869 \begin_inset Index idx
22872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22903 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22910 \begin_layout Standard
22911 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22916 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22919 \begin_layout Section
22921 \begin_inset Index idx
22924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 \begin_layout Standard
22934 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22947 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22949 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22950 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22951 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22959 \begin_layout Standard
22960 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22964 \begin_inset space ~
22969 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22972 \begin_layout Standard
22973 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22974 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22977 \begin_layout Standard
22978 This is a line with an inline formula
22979 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22985 \begin_layout Standard
22986 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22987 paragraph, like this one:
22988 \begin_inset Formula
22995 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22998 \begin_layout Standard
23000 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23002 For example, typing
23003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23016 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23017 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23021 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23024 \begin_inset space ~
23032 \begin_layout Subsection
23033 Navigating in Formulas
23034 \begin_inset Index idx
23037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23046 \begin_layout Standard
23047 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23048 achieved with the arrow keys.
23050 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23051 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23056 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23057 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23061 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23065 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23068 \end{array}\right]$
23076 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23081 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23082 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23085 \begin_layout Standard
23090 , printed in this document as
23091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23095 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23102 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23103 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23104 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23109 For example, if you want
23110 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23118 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23128 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23132 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23137 , since in the latter case only the
23140 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23145 will be under the square root sign:
23146 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23152 \begin_layout Standard
23153 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23155 \begin_inset Formula
23157 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23166 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23167 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23170 \begin_layout Subsection
23174 \begin_layout Standard
23175 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23176 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23180 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23181 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23182 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23183 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23184 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23188 \begin_layout Subsection
23189 Exponents and Subscripts
23190 \begin_inset Index idx
23193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23200 \begin_inset Index idx
23203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23212 \begin_layout Standard
23213 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23216 arg "math-superscript"
23222 arg "math-subscript"
23225 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23227 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23230 , type in a formula
23233 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23243 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23249 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23253 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23259 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23265 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23274 , you have to use an extra
23278 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23279 For example, if you want
23280 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23286 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23292 Subscripts are similar: To get
23293 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23299 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23307 \begin_layout Subsection
23309 \begin_inset Index idx
23312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23321 \begin_layout Standard
23322 Create a fraction either with the command
23328 or by using the icon
23331 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23337 \begin_inset space ~
23343 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23344 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23345 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23350 To move back up, press
23355 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23356 \begin_inset Formula
23358 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23361 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23369 \begin_layout Subsection
23371 \begin_inset Index idx
23374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23383 \begin_layout Standard
23384 Roots can be created using the
23387 \begin_inset space ~
23395 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23401 arg "math-insert \\root"
23423 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23429 always produces a square root.
23432 \begin_layout Subsection
23433 Operators with Limits
23434 \begin_inset Index idx
23437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23444 \begin_inset Index idx
23447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23456 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23463 \begin_layout Standard
23465 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23469 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23472 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23473 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23474 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23475 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23476 The sum operator will automatically place its
23477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23484 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23486 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23490 \begin_inset Formula
23492 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23497 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23501 \begin_layout Standard
23502 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23504 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23505 behind the operator and using the menu
23507 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23508 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23510 \begin_inset space ~
23514 \begin_inset space ~
23528 \begin_layout Standard
23529 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23538 \begin_inset Index idx
23541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23548 \begin_inset Formula
23550 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23555 which will place the
23556 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23568 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23569 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23575 \begin_layout Standard
23576 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23583 Have a look at section
23584 \begin_inset space ~
23588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23590 reference "subsec:Functions"
23594 for an explanation of function macros.
23597 \begin_layout Subsection
23599 \begin_inset Index idx
23602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23611 \begin_layout Standard
23612 Most math symbols can be found in the
23615 \begin_inset space ~
23620 under one of several categories; including
23637 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23641 \begin_layout Standard
23642 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23643 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23644 don't have to use the
23647 \begin_inset space ~
23652 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23654 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23657 \begin_layout Subsection
23659 \begin_inset Index idx
23662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23671 \begin_layout Standard
23672 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23678 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23684 \begin_inset space ~
23692 arg "math-insert \\space"
23696 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23697 For example, the sequence
23702 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23705 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23707 \begin_inset Graphics
23708 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23713 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23714 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23715 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23716 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23717 , because they are negative
23719 Here are two examples:
23722 \begin_layout Standard
23732 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23738 \begin_layout Standard
23748 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23754 \begin_layout Subsection
23756 \begin_inset Index idx
23759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23768 name "subsec:Functions"
23775 \begin_layout Standard
23779 \begin_inset space ~
23784 contains under the button
23787 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23790 a number of function macros, such as
23791 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23795 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23803 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23810 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23811 avoid confusions, because
23812 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23816 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23822 \begin_layout Standard
23823 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23825 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23829 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23835 \begin_layout Standard
23836 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23837 are placed, as described in section
23838 \begin_inset space ~
23842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23844 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23851 \begin_layout Subsection
23853 \begin_inset Index idx
23856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23865 \begin_layout Standard
23866 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23868 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23869 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23870 commands, for example, to enter
23871 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23874 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23875 Our example is entered by typing
23880 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23887 \begin_inset space ~
23891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23893 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23897 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23900 \begin_layout Standard
23901 \begin_inset Float table
23906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23907 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23912 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23916 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23926 \begin_inset Tabular
23927 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23928 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23929 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23930 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23931 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24015 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24069 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24123 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24177 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24231 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24285 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24339 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24393 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24447 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24492 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24513 \begin_layout Standard
24514 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24517 \begin_inset space ~
24525 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24528 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24532 \begin_layout Section
24533 Brackets and Delimiters
24534 \begin_inset Index idx
24537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24544 \begin_inset Index idx
24547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24556 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24563 \begin_layout Standard
24564 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24566 For some purposes, using just the keys
24571 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24572 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24573 toolbar delimiter icon
24576 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24580 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24581 \begin_inset Formula
24583 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24591 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24592 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24596 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24599 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24605 \begin_inset Formula
24607 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24615 \begin_layout Standard
24616 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24617 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24621 \begin_layout Standard
24622 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24623 left side and right side.
24624 If you use the option
24627 \begin_inset space ~
24632 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24633 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24635 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24640 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24641 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24644 \begin_layout Standard
24645 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24646 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24647 is to go inside the brackets.
24648 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24653 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24654 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24655 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24659 arg "math-delim ( )"
24665 \begin_layout Section
24666 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24667 \begin_inset Index idx
24670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24677 \begin_inset Index idx
24680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24687 \begin_inset Index idx
24690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24691 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24699 \begin_layout Standard
24700 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24704 \begin_inset space ~
24712 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24716 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24717 Here is an example:
24718 \begin_inset Formula
24720 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24729 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24730 \begin_inset space ~
24734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24736 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24741 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24742 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24743 This alignment is set in the box
24748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24797 for every column as default.
24798 For example, the sequence
24799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24810 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24811 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24812 corresponds to the relevant column.
24813 The result will look like this:
24814 \begin_inset Formula
24817 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24818 column & has & has\,right\\
24819 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24828 \begin_layout Standard
24829 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24832 arg "newline-insert newline"
24835 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24836 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24838 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24841 or the math toolbar.
24844 \begin_layout Standard
24845 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24846 It can be created with the menu
24848 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24849 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24851 \begin_inset space ~
24863 Here is an example:
24864 \begin_inset Formula
24878 \begin_layout Standard
24879 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24882 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24885 arg "newline-insert newline"
24889 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24894 arg "newline-insert newline"
24897 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24905 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24906 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24907 A new row is created by every further entry of
24910 arg "newline-insert newline"
24914 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24915 Here is an example:
24916 \begin_inset Formula
24918 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24919 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24924 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24925 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24926 \begin_inset Formula
24928 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24936 \begin_layout Standard
24937 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24944 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24945 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24948 reference "eq:asquared"
24953 The other types are described in section
24954 \begin_inset space ~
24958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24960 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24967 \begin_layout Section
24968 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24969 \begin_inset Index idx
24972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24973 Math ! Formula numbering
24979 \begin_inset Index idx
24982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24983 Math ! Referencing formulas
24989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24991 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24998 \begin_layout Standard
24999 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25001 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25002 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25004 \begin_inset space ~
25008 \begin_inset space ~
25016 arg "math-number-toggle"
25020 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25021 within parentheses.
25022 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25023 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25024 the document class.
25025 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25026 separated by a dot:
25027 \begin_inset Formula
25037 arg "math-number-toggle"
25040 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25041 You can only number displayed formulas.
25044 \begin_layout Standard
25045 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25047 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25048 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25050 \begin_inset space ~
25054 \begin_inset space ~
25062 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25065 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25066 \begin_inset Formula
25069 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25075 To number all lines use the shortcut
25078 arg "math-number-toggle"
25084 \begin_layout Standard
25085 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25088 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25089 A label is inserted with the menu
25091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25100 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25101 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25102 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25114 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25115 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25116 We inserted in the following example the label
25117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25124 in the second line:
25125 \begin_inset Formula
25127 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25128 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25133 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25134 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25135 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25137 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25139 \begin_inset space ~
25147 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25151 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25152 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25153 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25154 as the formula number:
25157 \begin_layout Standard
25158 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25161 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25168 \begin_layout Standard
25169 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25170 's cross-reference box are described in section
25171 \begin_inset space ~
25175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25177 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25182 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25190 \begin_layout Section
25191 User defined math macros
25192 \begin_inset Index idx
25195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25204 \begin_layout Standard
25206 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25207 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25208 Math macros are explained in section
25211 \begin_inset space ~
25223 \begin_layout Section
25227 \begin_layout Subsection
25229 \begin_inset Index idx
25232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25241 \begin_layout Standard
25242 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25243 To set a font in a formula, use the
25246 \begin_inset space ~
25254 arg "math-insert \\font"
25257 , or enter its command, listed in table
25258 \begin_inset space ~
25262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25264 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25271 \begin_layout Standard
25272 \begin_inset Float table
25277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25278 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25283 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25287 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25297 \begin_inset Tabular
25298 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25299 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25300 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25301 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25333 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25360 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25387 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25420 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25447 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25474 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25508 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25535 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25569 \begin_layout Standard
25570 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25578 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25594 \begin_layout Standard
25595 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25596 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25601 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25602 space when you need a space in the box.
25603 Here is an example where
25604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25615 denotes the set of numbers:
25616 \begin_inset Formula
25618 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25626 \begin_layout Standard
25627 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25628 You can, for example, put a character in
25637 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25641 \begin_inset Newline newline
25644 So it is better not to use this feature.
25647 \begin_layout Standard
25648 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25649 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25653 \begin_inset Newline newline
25656 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25662 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25663 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25669 \begin_layout Standard
25676 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25679 \begin_layout Standard
25680 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25682 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25683 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25685 \begin_inset space ~
25693 \begin_layout Subsection
25695 \begin_inset Index idx
25698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25707 \begin_layout Standard
25708 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25710 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25714 \begin_inset space ~
25718 \begin_inset space ~
25726 \begin_inset space ~
25734 arg "math-insert \\font"
25738 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25739 in black instead of blue.
25740 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25741 Here is an example:
25742 \begin_inset Formula
25745 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25746 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25755 \begin_layout Subsection
25757 \begin_inset Index idx
25760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25769 \begin_layout Standard
25770 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25771 automatically chosen in most situations.
25789 For most characters,
25797 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25798 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25803 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25804 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25805 thinks are appropriate.
25806 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25809 arg "math-insert \\style"
25813 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25814 For example, you can set
25815 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25818 , which is normally in
25827 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25831 The four styles are used in the following example:
25834 \begin_layout Standard
25835 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25839 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25843 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25847 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25853 \begin_layout Standard
25854 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25855 is set in a particular size with the menu
25857 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25859 \begin_inset space ~
25864 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25865 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25866 will be adjusted to correspond.
25867 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25878 \begin_layout Standard
25882 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25888 \begin_layout Section
25889 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25891 \begin_inset Index idx
25894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25901 \begin_inset Index idx
25904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25913 \begin_layout Standard
25915 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25916 that are in common use.
25919 \begin_layout Subsection
25920 Enabling AMS-Support
25923 \begin_layout Standard
25924 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25925 the document by selecting the checkbox
25928 \begin_inset space ~
25932 \begin_inset space ~
25936 \begin_inset space ~
25943 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25947 \begin_inset Index idx
25950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25951 Document ! Settings
25959 \begin_inset space ~
25965 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25966 -errors in formulas,
25967 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25970 \begin_layout Subsection
25972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25974 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25979 \begin_inset Index idx
25982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25983 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25991 \begin_layout Standard
25992 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25993 provides a selection of different formula types.
25995 allows you to choose between
26016 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26017 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26023 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26026 \begin_layout Chapter
26030 \begin_layout Section
26032 \begin_inset Index idx
26035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26044 name "sec:Cross-References"
26051 \begin_layout Standard
26052 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26053 's strengths is cross-references.
26054 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26056 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26057 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26058 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26061 \begin_layout Enumerate
26065 \begin_layout Enumerate
26066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26068 name "enu:Second-item"
26075 \begin_layout Enumerate
26079 \begin_layout Standard
26080 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26082 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26085 or by pressing the toolbar button
26092 A gray label box like this:
26093 \begin_inset Graphics
26094 filename clipart/label.png
26098 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26100 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26135 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26136 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26152 \begin_layout Standard
26153 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26158 or the toolbar button
26161 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26165 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26166 \begin_inset Graphics
26167 filename clipart/reference.png
26171 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26173 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26186 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26190 \begin_layout Standard
26191 As an alternative to
26193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26196 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26201 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26202 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26204 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26216 \begin_layout Standard
26217 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26218 \begin_inset space ~
26222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26224 reference "enu:Second-item"
26231 \begin_layout Standard
26232 It is recommended to use a protected space
26236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26237 described in section
26238 \begin_inset space ~
26242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26244 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26253 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26254 line breaks between them.
26257 \begin_layout Standard
26258 There are six formats of cross-references:
26261 \begin_layout Description
26262 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26265 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26272 \begin_layout Description
26273 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26274 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26286 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26293 \begin_layout Description
26294 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26295 \begin_inset space ~
26299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26300 LatexCommand pageref
26301 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26308 \begin_layout Description
26310 \begin_inset space ~
26314 \begin_inset space ~
26317 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26319 LatexCommand vpageref
26320 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26325 \begin_inset Newline newline
26328 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26329 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26330 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26331 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26332 it prints “on the next page”.
26333 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26336 \begin_layout Description
26338 \begin_inset space ~
26342 \begin_inset space ~
26346 \begin_inset space ~
26349 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26352 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26357 \begin_inset Newline newline
26360 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26366 ; otherwise it behaves like
26370 \begin_inset space ~
26374 \begin_inset space ~
26383 \begin_layout Description
26385 \begin_inset space ~
26388 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26389 \begin_inset Newline newline
26393 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26401 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26411 \begin_inset Index idx
26414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26416 -packages ! prettyref
26422 \begin_inset Index idx
26425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26427 -packages ! refstyle
26438 \begin_inset Newline newline
26441 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26442 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26445 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26449 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26450 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26458 is the default and preferred because
26462 supports only English documents.
26463 The format is specified by using the command
26475 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26476 preamble of the document.
26477 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26490 ) can be done with this command
26491 \begin_inset Newline newline
26498 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26503 \begin_inset Newline newline
26506 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26508 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26510 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26517 \begin_layout Description
26519 \begin_inset space ~
26522 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26524 LatexCommand nameref
26525 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26532 \begin_layout Standard
26533 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26534 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26536 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26540 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26544 \begin_layout Standard
26545 You can only use the style
26549 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26553 is always possible.
26556 \begin_layout Standard
26557 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26558 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26560 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26561 \begin_inset space ~
26565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26567 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26574 \begin_layout Standard
26575 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26579 \begin_inset space ~
26583 \begin_inset space ~
26588 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26589 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26592 \begin_inset space ~
26597 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26598 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26601 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26607 \begin_layout Standard
26608 You can change labels at any time.
26609 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26610 do not need to think about this.
26613 \begin_layout Standard
26614 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26616 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26620 \begin_layout Standard
26621 References are described in detail in the section
26622 \begin_inset space ~
26632 \begin_inset space ~
26640 \begin_layout Section
26641 Table of Contents and other Listings
26642 \begin_inset Index idx
26645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26652 \begin_inset Index idx
26655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26656 Navigating ! Outline
26662 \begin_inset Index idx
26665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26681 \begin_layout Subsection
26683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26685 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26692 \begin_layout Standard
26693 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26695 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26696 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26698 \begin_inset space ~
26702 \begin_inset space ~
26708 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26710 If you click on it, the
26714 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26715 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26716 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26718 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26720 \begin_inset space ~
26725 that is described in section
26726 \begin_inset space ~
26730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26732 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26739 \begin_layout Standard
26740 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26741 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26743 \begin_inset space ~
26747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26749 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26753 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26755 \begin_inset space ~
26759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26761 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26765 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26767 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26770 \begin_layout Subsection
26771 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26774 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26781 \begin_layout Standard
26782 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26784 You can insert them via the
26786 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26790 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26793 \begin_layout Section
26794 URLs and Hyperlinks
26795 \begin_inset Index idx
26798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26805 \begin_inset Index idx
26808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26817 \begin_layout Subsection
26819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26828 \begin_layout Standard
26829 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26831 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26837 \begin_layout Standard
26838 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26840 \begin_inset Flex URL
26843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26853 \begin_layout Standard
26854 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26860 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26864 \begin_layout Standard
26865 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26873 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26882 \begin_layout Subsection
26884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26886 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26893 \begin_layout Standard
26894 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26899 or with the toolbar button
26906 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26915 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26916 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26917 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26919 name "LyX's homepage"
26920 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26924 , an Email address like this:
26925 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26927 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26928 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26933 , or a link to a file.
26936 \begin_layout Standard
26937 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26950 to the link target.
26953 \begin_layout Standard
26954 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26955 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26956 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26957 the text style dialog.
26958 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26962 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26964 name "LyX's homepage"
26965 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26972 \begin_layout Standard
26973 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26977 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26979 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26980 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26984 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26986 \begin_inset Newline newline
26994 \begin_inset Newline newline
27001 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27004 \begin_layout Section
27006 \begin_inset Index idx
27009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27018 name "sec:Appendices"
27025 \begin_layout Standard
27026 Appendices are created with the menu
27028 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27030 \begin_inset space ~
27034 \begin_inset space ~
27040 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27041 as the appendix part of the book.
27042 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27045 \begin_layout Standard
27046 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27047 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27048 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27049 and the subsection number.
27050 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27054 \begin_layout Standard
27056 \begin_inset space ~
27060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27062 reference "chap:Credits"
27067 \begin_inset space ~
27071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27073 reference "subsec:Export"
27080 \begin_layout Section
27082 \begin_inset Index idx
27085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27094 name "sec:Bibliography"
27101 \begin_layout Standard
27102 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27104 You can include a bibliography database,
27108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27109 Known under the name
27110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27113 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27123 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27124 manually, using the paragraph environment
27128 , which was described in section
27129 \begin_inset space ~
27133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27135 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27140 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27141 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27145 use a bibliography database.
27148 \begin_layout Subsection
27149 The Bibliography Environment
27152 \begin_layout Standard
27157 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27159 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27168 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27170 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27180 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27183 \begin_layout Standard
27184 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27186 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27189 or the toolbar button
27192 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27196 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27197 containing the available citations.
27198 Select one or more keys from the list and
27208 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27209 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27213 \begin_layout Standard
27214 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27215 entry with surrounding brackets.
27220 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27221 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27233 \begin_layout Standard
27237 Companion Second Edition
27240 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27242 key "latexcompanion"
27249 \begin_layout Standard
27250 The \SpecialChar LyX
27251 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27252 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27261 \begin_layout Standard
27262 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27265 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27267 \begin_inset space ~
27275 arg "layout-paragraph"
27279 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27282 \begin_layout Subsection
27283 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27285 \begin_inset Index idx
27288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27289 Bibliography ! Databases
27295 \begin_inset Index idx
27298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27299 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27308 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27315 \begin_layout Standard
27316 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27322 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27324 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27325 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27330 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27332 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27333 your working field in a database.
27334 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27335 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27336 list for that document.
27337 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27341 \begin_layout Standard
27342 The database is a text file with the file extension
27343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27354 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27355 The format is explained in
27356 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27362 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27364 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27366 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27371 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27372 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27373 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27375 \begin_inset Flex URL
27378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27380 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27388 \begin_layout Standard
27389 To use a database, use the menu
27391 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27396 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27398 \begin_inset space ~
27404 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27405 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27412 Add bibliography to TOC
27414 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27419 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27420 in the document or just the cited references.
27423 \begin_layout Standard
27424 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27436 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27437 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27438 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27439 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27441 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27447 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27448 \begin_inset Newline newline
27452 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27454 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27466 \begin_layout Standard
27467 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27470 \begin_layout Standard
27471 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27472 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27474 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27481 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27482 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27487 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27488 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27489 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27493 The following variants are possible:
27496 \begin_layout Description
27497 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27498 with other bibliography packages (e.
27499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27503 \begin_inset space \space{}
27510 ), only with the package
27514 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27518 \begin_layout Description
27519 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27520 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27521 with all bibliography packages, except
27526 \begin_layout Description
27527 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27532 , works with all bibliography packages
27535 \begin_layout Standard
27536 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27537 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27539 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27542 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27546 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27555 \begin_layout Standard
27556 When you select the option
27558 Sectioned bibliography
27562 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27563 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27566 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27567 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27569 Customizing Bibliographies
27573 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27578 Additional Features
27583 \begin_layout Standard
27584 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27585 the two methods of creating them.
27586 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27587 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27588 We used the style file
27592 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27595 \begin_layout Subsection
27597 \begin_inset Index idx
27600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27601 Bibliography ! Citation format
27609 \begin_layout Standard
27610 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27611 For this feature you need to enable the option
27617 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27621 \begin_inset Index idx
27624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27625 Document ! Settings
27635 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27636 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27637 style files as explained in
27638 the previous section.
27641 \begin_layout Standard
27642 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27643 the citation reference window.
27644 Here is an example where the text
27645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27649 \begin_inset space ~
27653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27656 appears after the reference:
27659 \begin_layout Standard
27661 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27664 key "latexcompanion"
27671 \begin_layout Section
27673 \begin_inset Index idx
27676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27692 \begin_layout Standard
27693 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27695 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27697 \begin_inset space ~
27702 or the toolbar button
27709 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27710 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27711 by \SpecialChar LyX
27712 as the index entry.
27715 \begin_layout Standard
27716 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27718 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27719 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27721 \begin_inset space ~
27727 A light blue box labeled
27728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27739 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27740 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27744 \begin_layout Standard
27745 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27746 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27747 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27748 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27750 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27752 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27759 \begin_layout Subsection
27760 Grouping Index Entries
27761 \begin_inset Index idx
27764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27773 \begin_layout Standard
27774 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27776 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27777 lists under the entry
27778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27786 First we create the entry
27787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27795 \begin_inset space ~
27799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27801 reference "subsec:Lists"
27806 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27807 \begin_inset space ~
27811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27813 reference "sec:Itemize"
27817 , we insert the command
27820 \begin_layout Standard
27826 \begin_layout Standard
27830 \begin_layout Standard
27836 \begin_layout Standard
27837 for the enumerated list in section
27838 \begin_inset space ~
27842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27844 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27851 \begin_layout Standard
27852 The exclamation mark
27853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27860 marks the grouping levels.
27861 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27862 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27863 If we don't have an index entry for
27864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27871 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27874 \begin_layout Subsection
27876 \begin_inset Index idx
27879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27880 Index ! Page ranges
27888 \begin_layout Standard
27889 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27891 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27892 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27893 an index entry in section
27894 \begin_inset space ~
27898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27900 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27907 \begin_layout Standard
27910 Paragraph environments|(
27913 \begin_layout Standard
27914 and another entry at the end of section
27915 \begin_inset space ~
27919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27921 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27928 \begin_layout Standard
27931 Paragraph environments|)
27934 \begin_layout Standard
27936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27959 respectively start and end the index range.
27960 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27961 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27962 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27963 An example is the index entry
27964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27967 Document ! Settings
27968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27974 \begin_layout Subsection
27976 \begin_inset Index idx
27979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27980 Index ! Cross referencing
27988 \begin_layout Standard
27989 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27990 We referred for example in the index entry
27991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27999 \begin_inset space ~
28003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28005 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28009 ) to the index entry
28010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28017 in the same section using the entry
28020 \begin_layout Standard
28023 GIF|see{Image formats}
28026 \begin_layout Standard
28027 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28029 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28030 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28033 \begin_layout Subsection
28035 \begin_inset Index idx
28038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28039 Index ! Entry order
28047 \begin_layout Standard
28048 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28049 follow the rules for the index order.
28050 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28056 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28058 \begin_inset space ~
28062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28064 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28073 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28074 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28099 \begin_inset Index idx
28102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28103 Dummy entries ! maïs
28109 \begin_inset Index idx
28112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28113 Dummy entries ! maître
28119 \begin_inset Index idx
28122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28123 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28128 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28129 maïs, maison, maître.
28130 To achieve this, we use the command
28133 \begin_layout Standard
28136 previous entry@current entry
28139 \begin_layout Standard
28140 In our case we want to have
28141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28156 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28159 \begin_layout Standard
28165 \begin_layout Standard
28166 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28167 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28169 See the next subsection for an example.
28172 \begin_layout Standard
28173 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28179 \begin_layout Standard
28180 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28185 to generate the index (see section
28186 \begin_inset space ~
28190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28192 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28201 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28202 -package aeguill in section
28203 \begin_inset space ~
28207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28209 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28213 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28214 -packages although all these index
28215 commands start with
28216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28229 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28234 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28237 \begin_layout Standard
28249 \begin_layout Standard
28261 \begin_layout Subsection
28263 \begin_inset Index idx
28266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28267 Index ! Entry layout
28275 \begin_layout Standard
28276 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28277 \begin_inset Index idx
28280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28283 This is an italic dummy entry
28288 You can also format the page number using the character
28289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28296 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28297 -command without a backslash.
28298 We can write for example
28301 \begin_layout Standard
28304 italic page number:|textit
28307 \begin_layout Standard
28308 to get the page number in italic.
28309 \begin_inset Index idx
28312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28313 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28318 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28319 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28337 \begin_inset space ~
28343 Have a look at section
28344 \begin_inset space ~
28348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28350 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28354 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28358 \begin_layout Standard
28359 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28367 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28371 to generate the index, see section
28372 \begin_inset space ~
28376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28378 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28387 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28392 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28393 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28396 key "latexcompanion"
28408 \begin_layout Standard
28409 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28411 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28412 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28413 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28414 If so, put the following in the preamble
28417 \begin_layout Standard
28429 \begin_layout Standard
28433 \begin_layout Standard
28439 \begin_layout Standard
28440 in the index entry.
28441 \begin_inset Index idx
28444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28445 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28450 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28451 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28452 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28455 \begin_layout Standard
28456 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28457 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28458 a bold font for all index entries.
28459 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28471 documentation for details,
28472 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28474 key "makeindex,xindy"
28481 \begin_layout Subsection
28483 \begin_inset Index idx
28486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28495 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28502 \begin_layout Standard
28503 If the index generation program
28507 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28508 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28512 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28513 distribution, is used.
28517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28522 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28523 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28524 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28525 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28526 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28536 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28538 dialog, see section
28539 \begin_inset space ~
28543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28545 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28550 The available options are listed and explained in
28551 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28553 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28558 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28562 \begin_layout Standard
28563 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28564 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28567 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28568 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28572 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28573 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28576 \begin_layout Subsection
28580 \begin_layout Standard
28581 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28582 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28590 next to the standard index.
28592 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28593 that add this feature.
28600 \begin_inset Index idx
28603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28605 -packages ! splitidx
28610 package to generate multiple indexes.
28611 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28617 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28619 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28626 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28627 style, but it also includes
28628 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28629 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28637 \begin_layout Standard
28638 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28639 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28641 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28642 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28645 and select the option
28647 Use multiple Indexes
28654 already contains the standard index
28655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28663 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28664 also appear as a heading) to the
28668 input field and press the
28673 The new index now also appears in the list.
28674 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28675 label color to the new index.
28678 \begin_layout Standard
28679 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28689 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28690 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28691 are additional features:
28694 \begin_layout Itemize
28695 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28696 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28699 \begin_layout Itemize
28700 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28701 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28709 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28710 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28711 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28712 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28715 \begin_layout Section
28716 Nomenclature/Glossary
28717 \begin_inset Index idx
28720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28727 \begin_inset Index idx
28730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28761 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28768 \begin_layout Standard
28769 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28770 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28771 called nomenclature or glossary.
28774 \begin_layout Standard
28775 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28782 \begin_inset Index idx
28785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28787 -packages ! nomencl
28793 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28795 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28801 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28805 \begin_layout Standard
28806 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28807 and then use the menu
28809 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28815 \begin_inset space ~
28820 or the toolbar button
28823 arg "nomencl-insert"
28828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28839 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28842 \begin_layout Standard
28843 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28844 The first is the term or
28848 that you wish to define.
28853 of the term or symbol.
28856 \begin_layout Standard
28857 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28865 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28866 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28874 \begin_layout Subsection
28875 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28876 \begin_inset Index idx
28879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28880 Nomenclature ! Layout
28888 \begin_layout Standard
28889 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28893 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28900 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28908 \begin_inset Newline newline
28916 \begin_inset Newline newline
28922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28929 character starts/ends the formula.
28930 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28931 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28943 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28953 \begin_layout Standard
28954 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28955 -syntax is given in section
28956 \begin_inset space ~
28960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28962 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28969 \begin_layout Standard
28973 \begin_inset space ~
28978 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28980 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28985 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28992 in this document is:
28993 \begin_inset Newline newline
28998 dummy entry for the character
29003 \begin_inset Newline newline
29015 \begin_inset space ~
29025 font use the command
29054 \begin_layout Standard
29055 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29060 \begin_inset space \space{}
29064 \begin_inset Newline newline
29080 \begin_inset Newline newline
29083 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29084 This command will make the font of all symbols
29091 \begin_inset space ~
29099 \begin_layout Standard
29100 If the characters |
29101 \begin_inset space \space{}
29105 \begin_inset space \space{}
29109 \begin_inset space \space{}
29113 \begin_inset space \space{}
29117 \begin_inset space \space{}
29120 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29121 a quote character in front of them.
29122 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29123 LatexCommand nomenclature
29124 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29125 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29132 \begin_layout Subsection
29133 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29134 \begin_inset Index idx
29137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29138 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29146 \begin_layout Standard
29147 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29148 -code of the symbol
29150 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29152 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29155 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29156 LatexCommand nomenclature
29158 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29165 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29169 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29170 LatexCommand nomenclature
29173 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29178 They will be sorted by
29179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29205 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29208 will be sorted before the
29212 since the character
29213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29220 is considered in sorting.
29223 \begin_layout Standard
29224 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29227 \begin_inset space ~
29232 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29233 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29235 For the example given, you can insert
29239 in this field for the
29240 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29247 will be located before
29248 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29254 \begin_layout Standard
29255 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29260 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29269 \begin_layout Subsection
29270 Nomenclature Options
29271 \begin_inset Index idx
29274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29275 Nomenclature ! Options
29283 \begin_layout Standard
29288 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29289 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29292 \begin_layout Description
29293 refeq Appends the phrase
29294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29309 to every nomenclature entry, where
29315 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29318 \begin_layout Description
29319 refpage Appends the phrase
29320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29335 to every nomenclature entry, where
29341 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29344 \begin_layout Description
29345 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29348 \begin_layout Standard
29349 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29350 class options list in the
29352 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29356 In this document the options
29363 \begin_layout Standard
29364 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29370 \begin_layout Standard
29371 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29372 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29377 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29380 \begin_layout Description
29390 \begin_layout Description
29393 nomrefpage Like the
29400 \begin_layout Description
29403 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29412 \begin_layout Description
29416 \begin_inset space ~
29422 \begin_inset space ~
29427 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29430 \begin_layout Standard
29432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29439 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29440 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29444 \begin_layout Standard
29452 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29455 \begin_inset Newline newline
29462 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29467 \begin_inset Newline newline
29471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29486 by their translation.
29489 \begin_layout Subsection
29490 Printing the Nomenclature
29491 \begin_inset Index idx
29494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29495 Nomenclature ! Printing
29503 \begin_layout Standard
29504 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29506 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29507 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29523 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29524 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29525 You can choose between these settings:
29528 \begin_layout Description
29529 Default a space of 1
29530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29536 \begin_layout Description
29538 \begin_inset space ~
29542 \begin_inset space ~
29545 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29548 \begin_layout Description
29549 Custom custom space
29552 \begin_layout Standard
29553 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29562 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29570 For example, in order to change the name to
29574 , add the following line to the preamble:
29577 \begin_layout Standard
29585 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29588 \begin_layout Subsection
29589 Nomenclature Program
29590 \begin_inset Index idx
29593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29594 Nomenclature ! Program
29600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29602 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29609 \begin_layout Standard
29615 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29616 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29618 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29623 by adding options, see section
29624 \begin_inset space ~
29628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29630 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29635 The available options are listed and explained in
29636 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29638 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29645 \begin_layout Section
29647 \begin_inset Index idx
29650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29657 \begin_inset Index idx
29660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29661 Document ! Branches
29667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29669 name "sec:Branches"
29676 \begin_layout Standard
29677 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29678 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29679 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29680 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29683 \begin_layout Standard
29684 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29685 allows you to put text into branches.
29686 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29687 To create a branch, either select the menu
29689 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29690 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29693 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29702 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29703 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29704 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29705 and whether the name of the branch should
29706 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29707 (see below for an example).
29708 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29709 to the name of the other) and to add
29710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29722 \begin_inset space ~
29725 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29726 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29729 \begin_layout Standard
29730 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29731 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29736 where you can choose a branch.
29737 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29741 \begin_layout Standard
29742 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29743 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29746 \begin_layout Standard
29747 \begin_inset Branch Question
29750 \begin_layout Standard
29751 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29759 \begin_layout Standard
29760 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29763 \begin_layout Standard
29764 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29772 \begin_layout Standard
29779 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29780 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29783 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29784 Consider for example a file
29785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29792 which has the above branches.
29794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29801 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29825 branch were inactive,
29826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29841 branch was active, likewise
29842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29857 branch was active, and
29858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29861 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29865 if both branches were active.
29866 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29869 \begin_layout Standard
29870 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29876 \begin_layout Standard
29877 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29878 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29879 definitions for each branch.
29880 For example you can define for the question branch
29884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29885 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29886 -syntax, see section
29887 \begin_inset space ~
29891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29893 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29905 \begin_layout Standard
29915 \begin_layout Standard
29925 \begin_layout Standard
29926 and for the answer branch
29929 \begin_layout Standard
29939 \begin_layout Standard
29949 \begin_layout Standard
29950 \begin_inset Branch Question
29953 \begin_layout Standard
29957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29985 \begin_layout Standard
29986 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29989 \begin_layout Standard
29993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30021 \begin_layout Standard
30022 Now it is possible to use the
30026 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30033 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30036 commands to obtain conditional output.
30037 Here is an example formula where only the
30044 \begin_inset Formula
30046 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30054 \begin_layout Standard
30055 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30063 \begin_layout Standard
30064 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30070 \begin_inset space \space{}
30073 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30075 For this advanced usage, see the
30081 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30086 \begin_layout Section
30088 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30090 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30095 \begin_inset Index idx
30098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30107 \begin_layout Standard
30110 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30111 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30114 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30116 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30122 \begin_inset Index idx
30125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30127 -packages ! hyperref
30132 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30133 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30134 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30135 part of the document.
30139 \begin_layout Standard
30140 The header information in the dialog tab
30144 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30145 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30146 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30147 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30151 \begin_inset space ~
30155 \begin_inset space ~
30160 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30161 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30162 and author entries.
30166 \begin_inset space ~
30170 \begin_inset space ~
30174 \begin_inset space ~
30179 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30182 \begin_layout Standard
30183 You can specify in the dialog tab
30187 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30192 \begin_inset space ~
30196 \begin_inset space ~
30200 \begin_inset space ~
30205 option allows long links to be split;
30208 \begin_inset space ~
30212 \begin_inset space ~
30216 \begin_inset space ~
30224 \begin_inset space ~
30229 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30232 \begin_inset space ~
30237 colors the different links.
30238 The default colors are:
30241 \begin_layout Labeling
30242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30247 for hyperlinks and URLs
30250 \begin_layout Labeling
30251 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30259 \begin_layout Labeling
30260 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30268 \begin_layout Standard
30269 but you can change these in the field
30274 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30277 \begin_layout Standard
30280 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30283 \begin_layout Standard
30288 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30289 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30290 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30293 \begin_layout Standard
30298 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30299 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30300 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30310 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30311 when opening the PDF.
30313 \begin_inset space ~
30316 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30317 \begin_inset space ~
30320 1 will only display the sections.
30323 \begin_layout Standard
30324 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30325 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30331 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30332 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30341 \begin_layout Section
30343 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30347 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30354 \begin_layout Subsection
30357 \begin_inset Index idx
30360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30370 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30377 \begin_layout Standard
30378 As \SpecialChar LyX
30379 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30380 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30381 commands and constructs,
30384 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30385 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30386 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30387 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30388 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30389 cannot support all packages and
30393 \begin_layout Standard
30394 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30395 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30396 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30400 Code box is created by the menu
30402 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30404 \begin_inset space ~
30409 or by the toolbar button
30422 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30430 \begin_layout Standard
30431 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30433 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30435 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30436 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30443 , you can write the command part
30449 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30450 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30454 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30455 Code box behind the word.
30456 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30457 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30461 \begin_layout Standard
30462 \begin_inset Graphics
30463 filename clipart/ERT.png
30471 \begin_layout Standard
30475 \begin_layout Standard
30476 This is a line with a
30480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30503 \begin_layout Standard
30504 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30512 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30513 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30514 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30515 know that the command is finished.
30523 \begin_layout Subsection
30524 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30526 \begin_inset Argument 1
30529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30530 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30537 \begin_inset Index idx
30540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30550 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30557 \begin_layout Standard
30558 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30559 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30560 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30561 uses in the background.
30562 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30563 is based on commands, you can
30564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30572 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30573 any time if you know the right commands.
30574 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30575 is the end of the day.
30576 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30577 all caption labels bold.
30578 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30580 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30584 \begin_layout Standard
30585 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30587 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30589 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30592 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30601 \begin_layout Standard
30602 As result you find that the package
30607 \begin_inset Index idx
30610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30612 -packages ! caption
30618 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30620 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30623 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30627 \begin_inset space ~
30635 \begin_layout Standard
30640 usepackage[options]{package name}
30643 \begin_layout Standard
30644 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30645 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30646 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30647 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30650 \begin_layout Standard
30651 In your case the package name is
30656 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30661 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30662 So you add the command
30665 \begin_layout Standard
30670 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30673 \begin_layout Standard
30674 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30679 For more commands provided by the
30683 package, have a look at its documentation,
30684 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30698 \begin_layout Standard
30699 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30701 For example if you use a
30705 class, you don't need the package
30709 , you can instead write
30712 \begin_layout Standard
30717 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30722 \begin_layout Standard
30723 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30724 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30725 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30732 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30735 \begin_layout Standard
30736 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30737 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30739 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30740 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30741 Code box as described in the previous
30745 \begin_layout Standard
30746 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30747 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30750 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30752 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30759 \begin_layout Standard
30760 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30766 \begin_layout Standard
30770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30780 \begin_inset Note Note
30783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30784 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30792 \begin_layout Left Header
30793 \begin_inset Argument 1
30796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30816 \begin_inset Note Note
30819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30820 defines the header line as described below
30828 \begin_layout Center Header
30829 \begin_inset Argument 1
30832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30841 \begin_layout Right Header
30842 \begin_inset Argument 1
30845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30866 \begin_layout Left Footer
30867 \begin_inset Argument 1
30870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30891 \begin_layout Center Footer
30892 \begin_inset Argument 1
30895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30907 \begin_inset Newline newline
30911 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30917 \begin_layout Right Footer
30918 \begin_inset Argument 1
30921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30943 \begin_layout Section
30944 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30947 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30952 \begin_inset Index idx
30955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30956 Document ! Header/Footer line
30962 \begin_inset Index idx
30965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30974 \begin_layout Standard
30975 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30979 \begin_inset space ~
30990 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30996 \begin_inset space ~
31002 As a second step add in the menu
31004 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31005 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31012 Custom Header/Footerlines
31013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31017 This module offers the following 6
31018 \begin_inset space ~
31024 \begin_layout Description
31026 \begin_inset space ~
31030 \begin_inset space ~
31034 \begin_inset space ~
31038 \begin_inset space ~
31042 \begin_inset space ~
31048 \begin_layout Description
31050 \begin_inset space ~
31054 \begin_inset space ~
31058 \begin_inset space ~
31062 \begin_inset space ~
31066 \begin_inset space ~
31072 \begin_layout Standard
31073 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31076 \begin_layout Standard
31077 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31078 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31080 \begin_inset space ~
31084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31086 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31090 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31093 \begin_layout Standard
31094 \begin_inset Float figure
31100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31103 \begin_inset Tabular
31104 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31105 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31106 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31107 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31108 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31110 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31128 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31139 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31157 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31168 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31172 The normal text on the page goes here.
31173 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31175 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31176 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31181 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31190 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31201 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31219 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31230 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31248 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31266 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31271 name "fig:Page-layout"
31275 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31288 \begin_layout Standard
31289 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31297 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31301 \begin_inset space ~
31306 is set to “Default”.
31307 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31316 \begin_layout Subsection
31320 \begin_layout Standard
31321 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31322 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31323 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31324 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31326 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31327 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31330 \begin_layout Standard
31331 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31332 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31338 \begin_inset space ~
31346 \begin_layout Description
31349 thepage prints the current page number
31352 \begin_layout Description
31355 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31358 \begin_layout Description
31361 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31364 \begin_layout Description
31367 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31368 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31375 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31378 because it usually goes in a left header.
31381 \begin_layout Description
31384 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31385 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31387 It is normally used in the right header.
31390 \begin_layout Subsection
31391 Default header/footer
31394 \begin_layout Standard
31395 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31396 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31397 footer has the page number.
31398 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31399 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31400 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31403 \begin_inset space ~
31411 \begin_layout Subsection
31415 \begin_layout Standard
31416 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31417 Some pages are different.
31418 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31419 a new part or chapter in your book.
31420 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31421 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31422 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31426 Header and footer decoration line
31429 \begin_layout Standard
31430 By default, you get a 0.4
31431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31434 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31435 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31447 in the following way:
31450 \begin_layout Standard
31457 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31460 \begin_layout Standard
31461 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31470 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31477 \begin_layout Standard
31478 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31480 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31481 \begin_inset space ~
31485 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31494 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31495 Several header/footer lines
31498 \begin_layout Standard
31499 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31500 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31501 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31503 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31518 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31519 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31521 \begin_inset space ~
31529 \begin_layout Standard
31536 headheight}{height}
31539 \begin_layout Standard
31540 where height is a size in standard units.
31541 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31542 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31543 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31544 logfile with the menu
31546 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31552 \begin_inset space ~
31557 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31562 \begin_inset Index idx
31565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31567 -packages ! fancyhdr
31573 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31574 for your header/footer.
31577 \begin_layout Subsection
31581 \begin_layout Standard
31582 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31583 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31584 This example consists of the following definition:
31587 \begin_layout Description
31589 \begin_inset space ~
31598 , empty optional argument
31601 \begin_layout Description
31603 \begin_inset space ~
31606 Header empty, empty optional argument
31609 \begin_layout Description
31611 \begin_inset space ~
31620 in the optional argument
31623 \begin_layout Description
31625 \begin_inset space ~
31634 in the optional argument
31637 \begin_layout Description
31639 \begin_inset space ~
31652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31656 \begin_inset Newline newline
31660 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31667 in the optional argument
31670 \begin_layout Description
31672 \begin_inset space ~
31681 , empty optional argument
31684 \begin_layout Description
31687 headrulewidth set to 2
31688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31694 \begin_layout Standard
31695 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31696 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31702 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31711 \begin_layout Standard
31712 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31718 \begin_layout Standard
31722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31726 pagestyle{headings}
31732 \begin_inset Note Note
31735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31736 switches back to page style with the default headings
31744 \begin_layout Section
31745 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31748 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31753 \begin_inset Index idx
31756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31763 \begin_inset Index idx
31766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31775 \begin_layout Standard
31777 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31778 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31779 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31782 \begin_layout Subsection
31786 \begin_layout Standard
31787 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31793 \begin_inset Index idx
31796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31798 -packages ! preview-latex
31803 (on some systems named simply
31808 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31810 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31816 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31818 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31826 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31827 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31828 -package are automatically
31829 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31833 \begin_layout Subsection
31837 \begin_layout Standard
31838 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31839 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31841 activate the option
31844 \begin_inset space ~
31851 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31857 \begin_inset space ~
31861 \begin_inset space ~
31864 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31871 \begin_inset space ~
31884 \begin_inset space ~
31889 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31892 \begin_layout Standard
31893 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31898 \begin_inset space ~
31906 \begin_inset space ~
31914 \begin_layout Standard
31915 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31916 and when you finish
31920 \begin_layout Standard
31921 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31929 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31930 generated by activating the option
31933 \begin_inset space ~
31939 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31947 \begin_layout Subsection
31948 Selected document parts
31951 \begin_layout Standard
31952 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31953 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31954 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31955 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31957 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31959 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31963 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31964 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31965 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31968 \begin_layout Standard
31969 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31976 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31988 is explained in section
31990 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31995 \begin_inset space ~
32005 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32006 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32007 the final rotated boxes,
32008 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32009 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32011 Here is the result:
32014 \begin_layout Standard
32015 \begin_inset Preview
32017 \begin_layout Standard
32022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32026 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32032 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32042 height_special "totalheight"
32047 backgroundcolor "none"
32050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32075 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32081 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32103 \begin_layout Standard
32104 Previewing works also for colors.
32105 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32124 is explained in section
32131 \begin_inset space ~
32144 \begin_layout Standard
32145 \begin_inset Preview
32147 \begin_layout Standard
32151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32170 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32175 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32194 \begin_layout Standard
32195 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32201 \begin_layout Standard
32202 If \SpecialChar LyX
32203 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32204 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32205 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32206 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32207 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32208 the \SpecialChar TeX
32210 If \SpecialChar LyX
32211 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32212 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32214 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32215 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32216 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32219 \begin_layout Subsection
32224 \begin_layout Standard
32225 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32226 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32229 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32231 \begin_inset space ~
32236 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32238 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32240 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32241 's main window, then only this selection
32242 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32243 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32244 the source view window.
32249 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32250 ; but note that if you have
32251 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32253 not just the one which is open at the time.
32256 \begin_layout Section
32257 Advanced Find and Replace
32258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32260 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32265 \begin_inset Index idx
32268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32275 \begin_inset Index idx
32278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32287 \begin_layout Subsection
32291 \begin_layout Standard
32292 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32293 allows for searching of complex,
32294 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32296 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32297 The key-features are:
32300 \begin_layout Itemize
32301 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32302 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32303 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32307 \begin_layout Itemize
32308 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32309 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32310 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32311 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32314 \begin_layout Itemize
32315 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32316 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32317 outside of mathematics environments
32320 \begin_layout Itemize
32321 Search may be widened to a specific
32326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32330 \begin_inset space ~
32333 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32334 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32341 \begin_layout Itemize
32342 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32343 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32348 \begin_inset space ~
32351 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32354 \begin_layout Subsection
32358 \begin_layout Standard
32359 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32361 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32374 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32377 ) or the toolbar button
32380 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32386 Advanced Find and Replace
32391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32395 \begin_layout Standard
32401 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32405 \begin_inset space ~
32410 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32413 arg "paragraph-break"
32417 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32418 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32422 arg "paragraph-break"
32425 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32429 searches backwards.
32432 \begin_layout Standard
32436 \begin_inset space ~
32441 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32450 \begin_inset space ~
32455 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32458 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32459 Searching for mathematics
32462 \begin_layout Standard
32463 Mathematical formulas, such as
32464 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32467 or something more complex like
32468 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32471 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32476 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32477 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32478 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32479 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
32485 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32489 \begin_layout Standard
32490 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32491 This is done by switching to the
32495 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32500 This way, entering in the
32507 \begin_layout Itemize
32508 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32509 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32512 \begin_layout Itemize
32513 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32514 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32517 \begin_layout Itemize
32518 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32519 of it only within section headings.
32520 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32521 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32525 \begin_layout Itemize
32526 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32527 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32534 \begin_layout Standard
32535 The entries made in the
32539 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32542 \begin_inset space ~
32548 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32552 button or alternatively press
32555 arg "paragraph-break"
32562 while the cursor is in the
32565 \begin_inset space ~
32573 \begin_layout Standard
32574 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32576 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32580 \begin_layout Itemize
32581 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32582 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32590 with its typewriter version
32591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32605 \begin_layout Itemize
32606 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32612 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32624 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32631 (you may want to enable the
32634 \begin_inset space ~
32642 \begin_inset space ~
32647 options and disable the
32655 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32663 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32664 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32668 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32671 , or occurrences of
32672 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32676 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32682 \begin_layout Subsection
32686 \begin_layout Standard
32687 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32692 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32694 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32696 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32705 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32711 This is done with the context menu
32713 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32714 Insert Regular Expression
32716 while the cursor is in the
32721 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32722 expression matching rules
32726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32727 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32734 \begin_inset space ~
32737 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32738 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32744 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32745 same text in the document.
32746 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32747 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32750 \begin_layout Enumerate
32751 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32756 editor the fraction
32757 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32761 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32764 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32765 fractions with the given denominator.
32768 \begin_layout Enumerate
32769 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32781 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32786 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32787 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32788 Also, by inserting a
32789 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32792 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32793 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32796 \begin_layout Standard
32797 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32798 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32799 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32802 , and referring back to them through
32803 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32807 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32811 For example, try searching with the regexp
32812 \begin_inset Newline newline
32815 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32818 \begin_inset Newline newline
32821 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32824 \begin_layout Standard
32825 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32828 \begin_layout Standard
32829 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32837 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32838 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32839 sub-expressions is absolute.
32841 \begin_inset space ~
32845 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32848 always refers to the first occurrence of
32849 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32852 in all entered regexps.
32860 \begin_layout Section
32862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32864 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32869 \begin_inset Index idx
32872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32881 \begin_layout Standard
32883 has a built-in spell checker.
32886 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32893 key or the toolbar button
32896 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32899 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32900 beginning of the currently selected text.
32901 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32902 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32903 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32904 scrolled so that it is visible.
32905 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32906 n, if any could be found.
32907 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32911 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32912 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32915 \begin_layout Standard
32916 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32919 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32923 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32924 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32926 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32927 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32930 \begin_inset space ~
32938 arg "dialog-show character"
32941 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32943 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32946 \begin_layout Standard
32947 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32948 can be downloaded from here:
32949 \begin_inset Newline newline
32953 \begin_inset Flex URL
32956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32958 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32964 \begin_inset Newline newline
32968 \begin_inset space ~
32971 files for each language.
32972 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32973 \begin_inset space ~
32976 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32977 's installation subfolder
32985 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32987 \begin_inset Newline newline
32990 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32991 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32992 but in most cases these are
33008 is the language code.
33011 \begin_layout Subsection
33015 \begin_layout Standard
33018 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33019 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33021 \begin_inset space ~
33024 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33027 you can set the following things:
33030 \begin_layout Description
33032 \begin_inset space ~
33035 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33036 should use for spell checking.
33037 Depending on your platform,
33051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33052 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33053 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33068 \begin_inset space ~
33071 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
33074 \begin_layout Description
33076 \begin_inset space ~
33079 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33080 will always use the given language
33081 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33084 \begin_layout Description
33086 \begin_inset space ~
33089 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33095 \begin_inset space \space{}
33099 This should normally not be needed.
33102 \begin_layout Description
33104 \begin_inset space ~
33108 \begin_inset space ~
33111 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33123 \begin_layout Description
33125 \begin_inset space ~
33128 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33129 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33130 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33131 appear in a context menu.
33132 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33136 \begin_layout Description
33138 \begin_inset space ~
33142 \begin_inset space ~
33146 \begin_inset space ~
33149 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33153 \begin_layout Section
33155 \begin_inset Index idx
33158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33167 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33174 \begin_layout Standard
33176 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33177 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33187 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33189 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33198 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33200 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33201 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33202 which are available for many languages.
33205 \begin_layout Standard
33206 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33207 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33211 \begin_layout Subsection
33212 Setting up the thesaurus
33215 \begin_layout Standard
33224 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33228 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33233 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33239 \begin_inset space ~
33247 For instance, the US English files are named:
33250 \begin_layout Itemize
33254 \begin_layout Itemize
33258 \begin_layout Standard
33267 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33268 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33271 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33272 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33273 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33275 \begin_inset space ~
33280 ) to the path where they are installed.
33284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33285 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33286 ies, typical locations are
33292 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33296 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33300 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33303 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33309 LibreOffice-<Version>
33316 On the Mac, the default location is
33318 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33319 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33320 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33321 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33322 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33323 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33331 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33332 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33333 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33337 \begin_layout Standard
33338 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33339 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33343 \begin_layout Itemize
33344 \begin_inset Flex URL
33347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33349 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33357 \begin_layout Standard
33358 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33359 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33361 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33362 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33363 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33365 \begin_inset space ~
33370 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33372 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33373 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33377 \begin_layout Standard
33378 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33380 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33383 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33389 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33392 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33393 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33401 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33402 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33403 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33405 \begin_inset space ~
33410 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33413 \begin_layout Subsection
33414 Using the thesaurus
33417 \begin_layout Standard
33418 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33420 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33423 or the toolbar button
33426 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33429 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33431 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33433 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33434 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33435 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33444 ), related terms (such as
33447 \begin_inset space ~
33456 ), compounds (such as
33459 \begin_inset space ~
33468 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33477 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33480 \begin_layout Standard
33481 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33482 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33486 \begin_layout Standard
33487 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33488 the dictionary, such as the above
33492 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33497 \begin_inset space \space{}
33500 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33501 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33502 For example, looking up the word form
33506 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33511 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33516 \begin_inset space \space{}
33527 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33528 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33529 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33532 \begin_layout Section
33534 \begin_inset Index idx
33537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33544 \begin_inset Index idx
33547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33548 Document ! Change Tracking
33554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33556 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33563 \begin_layout Standard
33564 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33565 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33566 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33567 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33569 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33571 \begin_inset space ~
33574 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33576 \begin_inset space ~
33584 \begin_layout Standard
33585 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33599 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33600 You can change the color in
33602 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33603 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33605 \begin_inset space ~
33609 \begin_inset space ~
33614 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33620 \begin_inset Index idx
33623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33624 Color ! Change tracking
33629 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33630 's status bar when the
33631 cursor is in changed text.
33632 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33635 arg "changes-merge"
33641 \begin_layout Standard
33642 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33644 \begin_inset Index idx
33647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33656 \begin_layout Standard
33657 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33663 \begin_layout Standard
33664 \begin_inset Graphics
33665 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33673 \begin_layout Standard
33674 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33680 \begin_layout Standard
33681 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33684 \begin_layout Standard
33685 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33691 \begin_layout Standard
33692 \begin_inset Tabular
33693 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33694 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33695 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33696 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33697 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33706 arg "changes-track"
33714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33720 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33722 \begin_inset space ~
33725 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33727 \begin_inset space ~
33736 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33745 arg "changes-output"
33753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33759 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33761 \begin_inset space ~
33764 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33766 \begin_inset space ~
33770 \begin_inset space ~
33774 \begin_inset space ~
33783 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33804 Jumps to the next change
33810 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33819 arg "change-accept"
33827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33833 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33835 \begin_inset space ~
33838 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33840 \begin_inset space ~
33849 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33858 arg "change-reject"
33866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33872 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33874 \begin_inset space ~
33877 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33879 \begin_inset space ~
33888 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33897 arg "changes-merge"
33905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33911 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33913 \begin_inset space ~
33916 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33918 \begin_inset space ~
33927 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33936 arg "all-changes-accept"
33944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33952 \begin_inset space ~
33955 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33957 \begin_inset space ~
33961 \begin_inset space ~
33970 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33979 arg "all-changes-reject"
33987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33993 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33995 \begin_inset space ~
33998 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34000 \begin_inset space ~
34004 \begin_inset space ~
34013 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34036 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34037 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34039 \begin_inset space ~
34048 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34071 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34073 \begin_inset space ~
34089 \begin_layout Standard
34090 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34096 \begin_layout Standard
34097 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34117 \begin_layout Standard
34118 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34119 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34120 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34121 the next change after the current cursor position.
34122 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34123 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34124 step to the next change.
34125 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34128 \begin_layout Standard
34129 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34130 to describe a change.
34133 \begin_layout Standard
34134 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34140 \begin_inset Index idx
34143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34145 -packages ! dvipost
34151 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34153 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34159 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34163 \begin_layout Section
34164 Comparison of Documents
34165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34167 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34172 \begin_inset Index idx
34175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34176 Comparison of documents
34184 \begin_layout Standard
34185 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34188 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34192 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34193 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34195 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34197 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34201 \begin_inset space ~
34205 \begin_inset space ~
34209 \begin_inset space ~
34218 \begin_inset space ~
34222 \begin_inset space ~
34226 \begin_inset space ~
34230 \begin_inset space ~
34234 \begin_inset space ~
34238 \begin_inset space ~
34243 enables the change tracking option
34246 \begin_inset space ~
34250 \begin_inset space ~
34254 \begin_inset space ~
34259 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34262 \begin_layout Section
34263 International Support
34264 \begin_inset Index idx
34267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34268 International support
34276 \begin_layout Standard
34277 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34278 with any language you want.
34279 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34280 up \SpecialChar LyX
34282 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34284 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34291 \begin_layout Standard
34292 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34293 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34294 \begin_inset space ~
34298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34300 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34307 \begin_layout Subsection
34309 \begin_inset Index idx
34312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34319 \begin_inset Index idx
34322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34323 Document ! Settings
34329 \begin_inset Index idx
34332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34333 Document ! Language
34341 \begin_layout Standard
34344 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34345 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34348 dialog lets you set
34350 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34355 \begin_layout Standard
34360 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34365 \begin_inset space ~
34370 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34371 For details about the different encoding options see section
34372 \begin_inset space ~
34376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34378 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34385 \begin_layout Subsection
34386 Keyboard mapping configuration
34387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34389 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34396 \begin_layout Standard
34397 If you have for example a U.
34398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34401 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34402 can use an alternate keymap.
34403 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34408 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34409 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34410 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34413 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34414 \begin_inset space ~
34418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34420 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34425 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34426 which one you want to use.
34429 \begin_layout Standard
34430 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34431 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34432 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34436 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34437 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34438 one to support the characters you want.
34439 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34446 \begin_layout Chapter
34449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34451 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34458 \begin_layout Standard
34459 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34460 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34461 topic inside the user's guide.
34464 \begin_layout Section
34466 \begin_inset Index idx
34469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34478 \begin_layout Standard
34483 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34486 \begin_layout Subsection
34490 \begin_layout Standard
34491 Creates a new document.
34494 \begin_layout Subsection
34498 \begin_layout Standard
34499 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34500 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34501 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34504 \begin_layout Subsection
34508 \begin_layout Standard
34512 \begin_layout Subsection
34516 \begin_layout Standard
34517 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34518 Click there on a file to open it.
34521 \begin_layout Subsection
34525 \begin_layout Standard
34526 Closes the current document.
34529 \begin_layout Subsection
34533 \begin_layout Standard
34534 Closes all opened documents.
34537 \begin_layout Subsection
34541 \begin_layout Standard
34542 Saves the actual document.
34545 \begin_layout Subsection
34549 \begin_layout Standard
34550 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34553 \begin_layout Subsection
34557 \begin_layout Standard
34558 Saves all opened documents.
34561 \begin_layout Subsection
34565 \begin_layout Standard
34566 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34569 \begin_layout Subsection
34573 \begin_layout Standard
34574 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34575 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34576 It is described in the section
34578 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34583 Additional Features
34588 \begin_layout Subsection
34592 \begin_layout Standard
34593 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34594 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34596 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34597 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34601 \begin_layout Standard
34602 When using the menu entry
34605 \begin_inset space ~
34610 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34614 \begin_inset space ~
34618 \begin_inset space ~
34622 \begin_inset space ~
34627 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34628 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34631 \begin_layout Subsection
34633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34635 name "subsec:Export"
34642 \begin_layout Standard
34643 You can export your document to various file formats.
34644 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34646 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34647 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34648 during its configuration.
34651 \begin_layout Standard
34652 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34654 \begin_inset space ~
34658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34660 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34667 \begin_layout Description
34673 \begin_inset space ~
34676 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34678 \begin_inset space ~
34681 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34682 \begin_inset Newline newline
34685 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34686 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34690 \begin_layout Description
34691 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34697 \begin_layout Description
34699 \begin_inset space ~
34702 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34708 \begin_layout Description
34709 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34710 's native DVI-format.
34711 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34712 files paths or file names in your document.
34714 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34721 \begin_layout Description
34722 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34723 in files paths or file names
34726 \begin_layout Description
34728 \begin_inset space ~
34735 ) DVI-format using the program
34737 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34740 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34752 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34760 \begin_layout Description
34762 \begin_inset space ~
34765 (cropped) the same as
34769 but with cropped page margins.
34772 \begin_layout Description
34774 \begin_inset space ~
34777 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34781 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34786 \begin_layout Description
34790 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34798 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34806 \begin_layout Description
34808 \begin_inset space ~
34812 \begin_inset space ~
34815 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34819 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34827 \begin_layout Description
34831 \begin_inset space ~
34840 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34841 source that is compilable with the program
34843 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34847 \begin_layout Description
34851 \begin_inset space ~
34856 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34857 source, additionally all images used in the document
34858 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34862 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34865 \begin_layout Description
34869 \begin_inset space ~
34874 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34875 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34876 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34884 \begin_layout Description
34888 \begin_inset space ~
34897 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34898 source that is compilable with the program
34904 \begin_layout Description
34906 \begin_inset space ~
34910 \begin_inset space ~
34917 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34918 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34924 \begin_layout Description
34926 \begin_inset space ~
34929 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34930 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34932 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34936 \begin_inset space \space{}
34941 \begin_inset space ~
34945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34960 represent the version number)
34963 \begin_layout Description
34965 \begin_inset space ~
34969 \begin_inset space ~
34972 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34973 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34974 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34978 \begin_layout Description
34979 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34980 's internal XHTML engine
34983 \begin_layout Description
34985 \begin_inset space ~
34989 \begin_inset space ~
34993 \begin_inset space ~
34997 \begin_inset space ~
35000 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
35005 For the conversion the program
35014 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35017 \begin_layout Description
35018 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35023 \begin_layout Description
35025 \begin_inset space ~
35028 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
35030 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35033 For the conversion the program
35042 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35045 \begin_layout Description
35047 \begin_inset space ~
35050 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
35051 For the conversion the program
35060 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35063 \begin_layout Description
35065 \begin_inset space ~
35068 (cropped) the same as
35071 \begin_inset space ~
35076 but with cropped page margins
35079 \begin_layout Description
35083 \begin_inset space ~
35088 PDF-format using the program
35092 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35095 \begin_layout Description
35099 \begin_inset space ~
35103 \begin_inset space ~
35111 \begin_inset space ~
35116 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35121 \begin_inset space \space{}
35124 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35128 \begin_layout Description
35132 \begin_inset space ~
35137 PDF-format using the program
35139 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35142 , produces PDF-files directly
35145 \begin_layout Description
35149 \begin_inset space ~
35154 PDF-format using the program
35158 , produces PDF-files directly
35161 \begin_layout Description
35165 \begin_inset space ~
35170 PDF-format using the program
35174 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35177 \begin_layout Description
35181 \begin_inset space ~
35186 PDF-format using the program
35191 , produces PDF-files directly
35194 \begin_layout Description
35198 \begin_inset space ~
35206 \begin_layout Description
35210 \begin_inset space ~
35214 \begin_inset space ~
35219 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35220 and then exported as text using the program
35225 \begin_layout Description
35230 PostScript format using the program
35238 options see section
35239 \begin_inset space ~
35243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35245 reference "subsec:General-output"
35252 \begin_layout Description
35253 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35254 source and also code in the statistical programming
35268 it is possible to use
35272 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35276 \begin_layout Standard
35277 If one of the menu entries
35284 \begin_inset space ~
35293 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35295 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35297 \begin_inset space ~
35301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35303 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35308 \begin_inset Index idx
35311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35312 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35321 \begin_layout Subsection
35325 \begin_layout Standard
35326 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35327 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35330 \begin_inset space ~
35334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35336 reference "sec:Paths"
35341 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35350 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35351 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35352 's preferences as described in section
35353 \begin_inset space ~
35357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35359 reference "subsec:Converters"
35366 \begin_layout Subsection
35367 New and Close Window
35370 \begin_layout Standard
35371 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35375 \begin_layout Subsection
35379 \begin_layout Standard
35380 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35383 \begin_layout Section
35385 \begin_inset Index idx
35388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35397 \begin_layout Subsection
35401 \begin_layout Standard
35402 Described in section
35403 \begin_inset space ~
35407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35409 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35416 \begin_layout Subsection
35417 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35420 \begin_layout Standard
35421 Described in section
35422 \begin_inset space ~
35426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35428 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35435 \begin_layout Subsection
35439 \begin_layout Standard
35440 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35441 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35444 \begin_layout Subsection
35448 \begin_layout Standard
35449 Selects the whole document.
35452 \begin_layout Subsection
35453 Find & Replace (Quick)
35456 \begin_layout Standard
35457 Described in section
35458 \begin_inset space ~
35462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35464 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35471 \begin_layout Subsection
35472 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35475 \begin_layout Standard
35476 Described in section
35477 \begin_inset space ~
35481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35483 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35490 \begin_layout Subsection
35491 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35494 \begin_layout Standard
35495 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35499 \begin_layout Subsection
35503 \begin_layout Standard
35504 Described in section
35505 \begin_inset space ~
35509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35511 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35518 \begin_layout Subsection
35520 \begin_inset Index idx
35523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35524 Paragraph ! Settings
35532 \begin_layout Standard
35533 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35534 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35538 \begin_layout Standard
35539 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35540 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35546 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35547 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35549 \begin_inset space ~
35557 \begin_layout Subsection
35558 Table and Rows & Columns
35561 \begin_layout Standard
35562 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
35563 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35564 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
35567 \begin_layout Subsection
35571 \begin_layout Standard
35572 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
35573 It will dissolve this inset.
35574 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
35578 \begin_layout Subsection
35582 \begin_layout Standard
35583 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
35584 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
35587 \begin_layout Subsection
35588 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35591 \begin_layout Standard
35592 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35594 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35595 \begin_inset space ~
35599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35601 reference "sec:Nesting"
35606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35608 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35615 \begin_layout Subsection
35618 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35621 \begin_layout Standard
35622 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35623 nts of the same type.
35625 \begin_inset space ~
35629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35631 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35635 for an explanation.
35638 \begin_layout Section
35640 \begin_inset Index idx
35643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35652 \begin_layout Standard
35653 At the bottom of the
35657 menu the opened documents are listed.
35660 \begin_layout Subsection
35661 Open/Close all Insets
35664 \begin_layout Standard
35665 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35668 \begin_layout Subsection
35669 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35672 \begin_layout Standard
35673 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35676 \begin_layout Standard
35677 Math macros are described in the
35684 \begin_layout Subsection
35688 \begin_layout Standard
35689 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35690 \begin_inset space ~
35694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35696 reference "sec:Navigating"
35701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35703 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35710 \begin_layout Subsection
35714 \begin_layout Standard
35715 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35717 \begin_inset space ~
35721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35723 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35730 \begin_layout Subsection
35734 \begin_layout Standard
35735 Opens a window showing console messages.
35736 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35741 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35742 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35743 is processing the document.
35746 \begin_layout Subsection
35748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35750 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35755 \begin_inset Index idx
35758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35767 \begin_layout Standard
35768 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35769 All toolbars and the
35772 \begin_inset space ~
35777 can be turned on and off.
35782 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35794 \begin_inset space ~
35806 \begin_inset space ~
35811 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35815 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35822 \begin_layout Standard
35827 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35831 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35832 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35833 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35834 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35835 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35838 \begin_layout Standard
35840 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35841 \begin_inset space ~
35845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35847 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35854 \begin_layout Subsection
35858 \begin_layout Standard
35862 \begin_inset space ~
35866 \begin_inset space ~
35870 \begin_inset space ~
35874 \begin_inset space ~
35878 \begin_inset space ~
35882 \begin_inset space ~
35887 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35888 's main window vertically while
35891 \begin_inset space ~
35895 \begin_inset space ~
35899 \begin_inset space ~
35903 \begin_inset space ~
35907 \begin_inset space ~
35911 \begin_inset space ~
35916 will split it horizontally.
35917 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35918 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35919 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35920 three or more documents at the same time.
35921 To close a split view, use the menu
35924 \begin_inset space ~
35928 \begin_inset space ~
35936 \begin_layout Subsection
35940 \begin_layout Standard
35941 Closes a split view.
35944 \begin_layout Subsection
35948 \begin_layout Standard
35949 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35950 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35951 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35952 's main window fullscreen.
35953 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35954 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35957 \begin_layout Section
35959 \begin_inset Index idx
35962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35971 \begin_layout Subsection
35975 \begin_layout Standard
35976 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35977 \begin_inset space ~
35981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35983 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35994 \begin_layout Subsection
35996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35998 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36005 \begin_layout Standard
36006 Here you can insert the following characters:
36009 \begin_layout Description
36014 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36017 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36018 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36019 -packages you have installed.
36020 You can get a complete display by checking
36023 \begin_inset space ~
36029 \begin_inset Newline newline
36033 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36041 Not all characters will be visible in the
36045 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36046 dialog (see section
36047 \begin_inset space ~
36051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36053 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36057 ) can display every character.
36065 \begin_layout Description
36066 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36070 \begin_layout Description
36072 \begin_inset space ~
36076 \begin_inset space ~
36079 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36080 \begin_inset space ~
36084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36086 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36093 \begin_layout Description
36095 \begin_inset space ~
36098 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36102 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36108 \begin_layout Description
36110 \begin_inset space ~
36113 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36116 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36117 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36123 \begin_layout Description
36125 \begin_inset space ~
36128 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36132 \begin_layout Description
36134 \begin_inset space ~
36137 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36141 \begin_layout Description
36143 \begin_inset space ~
36146 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36152 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36158 \begin_layout Description
36160 \begin_inset space ~
36163 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36167 \begin_layout Description
36169 \begin_inset space ~
36173 \begin_inset Index idx
36176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36183 \begin_inset Index idx
36186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36187 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36192 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36193 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36195 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36201 \begin_inset Index idx
36204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36212 \begin_inset Newline newline
36215 More information about this feature can be found in the
36221 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36227 \begin_layout Description
36228 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36230 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36231 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36235 \begin_layout Subsection
36239 \begin_layout Standard
36240 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36243 \begin_layout Description
36244 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36245 \begin_inset script superscript
36247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36256 \begin_layout Description
36257 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36258 \begin_inset script subscript
36260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36269 \begin_layout Description
36271 \begin_inset space ~
36274 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36275 \begin_inset space ~
36279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36281 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36288 \begin_layout Description
36290 \begin_inset space ~
36293 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36294 \begin_inset space ~
36298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36300 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36307 \begin_layout Description
36309 \begin_inset space ~
36312 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36313 \begin_inset space ~
36317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36319 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36326 \begin_layout Description
36328 \begin_inset space ~
36331 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36337 \begin_inset space \space{}
36340 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36341 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36350 To insert a fraction use the command
36355 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36359 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36368 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36375 \begin_layout Description
36377 \begin_inset space ~
36380 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36381 \begin_inset space ~
36385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36387 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36394 \begin_layout Description
36396 \begin_inset space ~
36399 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36400 \begin_inset space ~
36404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36406 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36413 \begin_layout Description
36415 \begin_inset space ~
36418 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36419 \begin_inset space ~
36423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36425 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36432 \begin_layout Description
36433 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36434 \begin_inset space ~
36438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36440 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36447 \begin_layout Description
36449 \begin_inset space ~
36452 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36453 \begin_inset space ~
36457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36459 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36466 \begin_layout Description
36468 \begin_inset space ~
36471 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36472 \begin_inset space ~
36476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36478 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36485 \begin_layout Description
36487 \begin_inset space ~
36491 \begin_inset space ~
36494 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36495 \begin_inset space ~
36499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36501 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36508 \begin_layout Description
36510 \begin_inset space ~
36513 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36514 as described in section
36515 \begin_inset space ~
36519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36521 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36528 \begin_layout Description
36530 \begin_inset space ~
36533 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36534 \begin_inset space ~
36538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36540 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36547 \begin_layout Description
36549 \begin_inset space ~
36552 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36553 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36555 \begin_inset space ~
36559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36561 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36568 \begin_layout Description
36570 \begin_inset space ~
36573 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36574 \begin_inset space ~
36578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36580 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36587 \begin_layout Description
36589 \begin_inset space ~
36593 \begin_inset space ~
36596 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36597 \begin_inset space ~
36601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36603 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36610 \begin_layout Subsection
36614 \begin_layout Standard
36615 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36619 \begin_inset space ~
36640 are described in section
36641 \begin_inset space ~
36645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36647 reference "sec:toc"
36656 is described in section
36657 \begin_inset space ~
36661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36663 reference "sec:Index"
36671 is described in section
36672 \begin_inset space ~
36676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36678 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36684 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36687 is described in section
36688 \begin_inset space ~
36692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36694 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36701 \begin_layout Subsection
36705 \begin_layout Standard
36706 To insert floats, as described in section
36707 \begin_inset space ~
36711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36713 reference "sec:Floats"
36717 and in detail the chapter
36724 \begin_inset space ~
36732 \begin_layout Subsection
36736 \begin_layout Standard
36737 To insert notes, described in section
36738 \begin_inset space ~
36742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36744 reference "sec:Notes"
36751 \begin_layout Subsection
36755 \begin_layout Standard
36756 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36758 Branches are described in section
36759 \begin_inset space ~
36763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36765 reference "sec:Branches"
36772 \begin_layout Subsection
36776 \begin_layout Standard
36777 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36778 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36780 An example is the document class
36781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36788 with three custom insets.
36791 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36795 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36801 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36804 \begin_layout Subsection
36806 \begin_inset Index idx
36809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36818 \begin_layout Standard
36819 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36821 For more information see chapter
36823 External Document Parts
36826 \begin_inset space ~
36832 \begin_layout Subsection
36834 \begin_inset Index idx
36837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36846 \begin_layout Standard
36847 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36848 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36855 \begin_inset space ~
36863 \begin_layout Subsection
36867 \begin_layout Standard
36872 dialog as described in section
36873 \begin_inset space ~
36877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36879 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36886 \begin_layout Subsection
36890 \begin_layout Standard
36895 as described in section
36896 \begin_inset space ~
36900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36902 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36909 \begin_layout Subsection
36913 \begin_layout Standard
36918 as described in section
36919 \begin_inset space ~
36923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36925 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36932 \begin_layout Subsection
36934 \begin_inset Index idx
36937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36944 \begin_inset Index idx
36947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36948 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
36956 \begin_layout Standard
36957 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
36958 Floats are described in section
36959 \begin_inset space ~
36963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36965 reference "sec:Floats"
36969 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
36971 Multi-page Captions
36976 \begin_inset space ~
36984 \begin_layout Subsection
36988 \begin_layout Standard
36989 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36990 \begin_inset space ~
36994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36996 reference "sec:Index"
37003 \begin_layout Subsection
37007 \begin_layout Standard
37008 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37009 \begin_inset space ~
37013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37015 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37022 \begin_layout Subsection
37026 \begin_layout Standard
37027 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37028 Tables are described in section
37029 \begin_inset space ~
37033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37035 reference "sec:Tables"
37039 and in detail in the chapter
37046 \begin_inset space ~
37054 \begin_layout Subsection
37058 \begin_layout Standard
37064 Graphics are described in section
37065 \begin_inset space ~
37069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37071 reference "sec:Graphics"
37078 \begin_layout Subsection
37082 \begin_layout Standard
37083 Inserts a URL as described in section
37084 \begin_inset space ~
37088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37090 reference "subsec:URLs"
37097 \begin_layout Subsection
37101 \begin_layout Standard
37102 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37103 \begin_inset space ~
37107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37109 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37116 \begin_layout Subsection
37120 \begin_layout Standard
37121 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37122 \begin_inset space ~
37126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37128 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37135 \begin_layout Subsection
37139 \begin_layout Standard
37140 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37141 \begin_inset space ~
37145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37147 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37154 \begin_layout Subsection
37158 \begin_layout Standard
37159 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37160 title or caption of a float.
37161 Inserts a short title as described in section
37162 \begin_inset space ~
37166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37168 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37175 \begin_layout Subsection
37180 \begin_layout Standard
37181 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37182 Code box as described in section
37183 \begin_inset space ~
37187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37189 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37196 \begin_layout Subsection
37198 \begin_inset Index idx
37201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37210 \begin_layout Standard
37211 Inserts a program listings box.
37212 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37214 Program Code Listings
37219 \begin_inset space ~
37227 \begin_layout Subsection
37231 \begin_layout Standard
37232 Inserts the actual date.
37233 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37237 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37245 \begin_inset space ~
37253 \begin_layout Subsection
37257 \begin_layout Standard
37258 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37259 \begin_inset space ~
37263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37265 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37272 \begin_layout Section
37274 \begin_inset Index idx
37277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37286 \begin_layout Standard
37287 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37288 \begin_inset space ~
37291 of the current document.
37292 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37295 \begin_layout Subsection
37299 \begin_layout Standard
37300 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37301 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37302 to jump, for example, between section
37303 \begin_inset space ~
37307 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37308 \begin_inset space ~
37311 2.5 and use the submenu
37314 \begin_inset space ~
37318 \begin_inset space ~
37325 \begin_inset space ~
37331 \begin_inset space ~
37335 \begin_inset space ~
37341 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37345 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37351 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37354 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37357 \begin_layout Standard
37358 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37362 \begin_inset space ~
37367 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37370 \begin_inset space ~
37375 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37378 \begin_layout Subsection
37379 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37382 \begin_layout Standard
37383 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37387 \begin_layout Subsection
37391 \begin_layout Standard
37392 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37393 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37394 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37398 \begin_inset space ~
37402 \begin_inset space ~
37410 \begin_layout Subsection
37414 \begin_layout Standard
37415 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37418 The \SpecialChar LyX
37419 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37421 \begin_inset space ~
37429 \begin_inset space ~
37434 manual for a detailed description.
37437 \begin_layout Section
37439 \begin_inset Index idx
37442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37451 \begin_layout Subsection
37455 \begin_layout Standard
37456 Change Tracking is described in section
37457 \begin_inset space ~
37461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37463 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37470 \begin_layout Subsection
37478 \begin_layout Standard
37479 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37480 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37481 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37483 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37484 to the clipboard or update the view.
37485 \begin_inset Newline newline
37488 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37492 \begin_layout Standard
37495 Open Containing Directory
37497 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
37498 's temporary folder for the document.
37499 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
37500 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
37501 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
37502 For example some journals require to send the
37506 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37510 \begin_layout Subsection
37511 Start Appendix Here
37514 \begin_layout Standard
37515 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37516 as described in section
37517 \begin_inset space ~
37521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37523 reference "sec:Appendices"
37530 \begin_layout Subsection
37532 \begin_inset space ~
37538 \begin_layout Standard
37539 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37540 default output format for the document (menu
37542 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37543 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37544 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37546 \begin_inset space ~
37550 \begin_inset space ~
37556 \begin_inset space ~
37560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37562 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37566 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37569 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37570 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37572 \begin_inset space ~
37575 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37577 \begin_inset space ~
37580 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37582 \begin_inset space ~
37586 \begin_inset space ~
37592 \begin_inset space ~
37596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37598 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37602 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37603 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37605 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37606 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37608 \begin_inset space ~
37611 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37613 \begin_inset space ~
37616 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37626 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37631 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37632 when it is first configured.
37633 The default output format is
37636 \begin_inset space ~
37644 \begin_layout Subsection
37645 View (Other Formats)
37648 \begin_layout Standard
37649 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37650 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37651 actual document with an external program.
37652 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37653 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37654 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37656 All possible formats are listed in section
37657 \begin_inset space ~
37661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37663 reference "subsec:Export"
37668 You should at least see the menu entry
37673 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37675 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37677 \begin_inset space ~
37681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37683 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37688 \begin_inset Index idx
37691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37692 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37701 \begin_layout Standard
37702 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37703 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37705 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37706 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37708 \begin_inset space ~
37711 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37713 \begin_inset space ~
37716 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37720 \begin_inset space ~
37724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37726 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37731 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37732 when it is first configured.
37735 \begin_layout Subsection
37737 \begin_inset space ~
37743 \begin_layout Standard
37744 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37745 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37748 \begin_layout Subsection
37749 Update (Other Formats)
37752 \begin_layout Standard
37753 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37754 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37757 \begin_layout Subsection
37758 View Master Document
37761 \begin_layout Standard
37762 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37778 \begin_inset space ~
37783 manual for more information on this topic).
37784 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37785 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37789 \begin_inset space ~
37793 \begin_inset space ~
37798 generates the output of the whole book, while
37802 will just output the chapter alone.
37805 \begin_layout Standard
37806 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37807 in the document settings (menu
37809 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37810 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37811 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37813 \begin_inset space ~
37817 \begin_inset space ~
37823 \begin_inset space ~
37827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37829 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37833 ) or in the preferences (menu
37835 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37836 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37838 \begin_inset space ~
37841 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37843 \begin_inset space ~
37846 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37848 \begin_inset space ~
37852 \begin_inset space ~
37858 \begin_inset space ~
37862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37864 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37871 \begin_layout Subsection
37872 Update Master Document
37875 \begin_layout Standard
37876 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37892 \begin_inset space ~
37897 manual for more information on this topic).
37898 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37899 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37902 \begin_layout Standard
37903 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37904 in the document settings (menu
37906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37908 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37910 \begin_inset space ~
37914 \begin_inset space ~
37920 \begin_inset space ~
37924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37926 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37930 ) or in the preferences (menu
37932 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37933 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37935 \begin_inset space ~
37938 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37940 \begin_inset space ~
37943 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37945 \begin_inset space ~
37949 \begin_inset space ~
37955 \begin_inset space ~
37959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37961 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37968 \begin_layout Subsection
37970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37972 name "subsec:Compressed"
37979 \begin_layout Standard
37980 Un/compresses the current document.
37981 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37982 compression (see the
37984 Additional Features
37986 manual for details).
37989 \begin_layout Subsection
37993 \begin_layout Standard
37994 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
37997 \begin_layout Subsection
38001 \begin_layout Standard
38002 The document settings are described in appendix
38003 \begin_inset space ~
38007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38009 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38016 \begin_layout Section
38018 \begin_inset Index idx
38021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38030 \begin_layout Subsection
38034 \begin_layout Standard
38035 Spell checking is explained in section
38036 \begin_inset space ~
38040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38042 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38049 \begin_layout Subsection
38053 \begin_layout Standard
38054 The thesaurus is described in section
38055 \begin_inset space ~
38059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38061 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38068 \begin_layout Subsection
38070 \begin_inset Index idx
38073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38080 \begin_inset Index idx
38083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38092 \begin_layout Standard
38093 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38094 the highlighted document part.
38097 \begin_layout Subsection
38103 \begin_inset Index idx
38106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38107 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38116 \begin_layout Standard
38117 Generates with the help of the program
38119 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38122 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38123 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38124 This feature is not available on Windows.
38127 \begin_layout Subsection
38133 \begin_inset Index idx
38136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38146 \begin_layout Standard
38147 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38152 \begin_inset space ~
38157 to see the full filename paths.
38160 \begin_layout Subsection
38162 \begin_inset Index idx
38165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38174 \begin_layout Standard
38175 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38176 files as described in section
38177 \begin_inset space ~
38181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38183 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38190 \begin_layout Subsection
38192 \begin_inset Index idx
38195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38208 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38226 \begin_inset Index idx
38229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38230 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38239 \begin_layout Standard
38240 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38241 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38242 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38243 -packages and programs it needs; see
38245 \begin_inset space ~
38249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38251 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38258 \begin_layout Subsection
38262 \begin_layout Standard
38267 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38268 \begin_inset space ~
38272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38274 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38281 \begin_layout Section
38283 \begin_inset Index idx
38286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38295 \begin_layout Standard
38296 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38297 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38299 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38303 \begin_layout Standard
38307 \begin_inset space ~
38312 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38313 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38314 packages and classes found
38315 by \SpecialChar LyX
38317 \begin_inset space ~
38321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38323 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38330 \begin_layout Standard
38334 \begin_inset space ~
38339 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38344 \begin_layout Section
38346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38348 name "sec:Toolbars"
38355 \begin_layout Standard
38356 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38357 \begin_inset space ~
38361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38363 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38370 \begin_layout Standard
38371 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38372 This is described in the
38374 Additional Features
38379 \begin_layout Subsection
38381 \begin_inset Index idx
38384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38393 \begin_layout Standard
38394 \begin_inset Graphics
38395 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38403 \begin_layout Standard
38404 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38410 \begin_layout Standard
38411 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38428 \begin_inset Note Note
38431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38432 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38437 manual for more information.
38445 \begin_layout Standard
38446 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38452 \begin_layout Standard
38453 \begin_inset Tabular
38454 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38455 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38456 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38457 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38463 \begin_inset Graphics
38464 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38478 pull-down box for the environments
38491 \begin_layout Standard
38492 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38498 \begin_layout Standard
38500 \begin_inset Tabular
38501 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38502 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38503 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38504 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38505 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38528 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38535 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38558 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38565 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38588 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38595 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38604 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38618 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38625 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38634 arg "spelling-continuously"
38642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38646 Spellcheck continuously
38652 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38675 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38682 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38705 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38712 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38735 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38742 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38765 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38772 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38795 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38802 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38811 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38825 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38844 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38851 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38865 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38867 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38871 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38884 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38893 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38907 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38908 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38915 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38936 Emphasize text, function of the
38938 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38940 \begin_inset space ~
38943 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38952 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38973 Set text to noun style, function of the
38975 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38977 \begin_inset space ~
38980 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38989 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38998 arg "textstyle-apply"
39006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39010 Format text using the current settings in the
39012 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39014 \begin_inset space ~
39017 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39026 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39049 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39050 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39052 \begin_inset space ~
39061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39070 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39084 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39098 arg "tabular-insert"
39106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39128 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39140 Toggle outline window on/off,
39142 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39149 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39158 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39170 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39176 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39185 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39197 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39210 \begin_layout Subsection
39212 \begin_inset Index idx
39215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39224 \begin_layout Standard
39225 \begin_inset Graphics
39226 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39234 \begin_layout Standard
39235 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39241 \begin_layout Standard
39242 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39246 \begin_layout Standard
39247 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39253 \begin_layout Standard
39254 \begin_inset Tabular
39255 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39256 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39257 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39258 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39259 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39286 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39295 arg "layout Enumerate"
39303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39313 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39322 arg "layout Itemize"
39330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39340 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39367 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39376 arg "layout Description"
39384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39394 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39403 arg "depth-increment"
39411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39417 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39419 \begin_inset space ~
39423 \begin_inset space ~
39432 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39441 arg "depth-decrement"
39449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39455 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39457 \begin_inset space ~
39461 \begin_inset space ~
39470 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39479 arg "float-insert figure"
39487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39493 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39494 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39501 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39510 arg "float-insert table"
39518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39524 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39525 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39532 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39555 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39562 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39571 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39585 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39592 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39601 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39622 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39645 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39647 \begin_inset space ~
39656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39665 arg "nomencl-insert"
39673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39681 \begin_inset space ~
39690 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39699 arg "footnote-insert"
39707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39713 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39720 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39729 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39743 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39745 \begin_inset space ~
39754 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39778 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39780 \begin_inset space ~
39789 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39798 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39812 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39819 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39842 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39849 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39872 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39874 \begin_inset space ~
39883 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39892 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39906 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39907 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39914 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39923 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39937 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39938 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39940 \begin_inset space ~
39949 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39958 arg "dialog-show character"
39966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39972 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39974 \begin_inset space ~
39977 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39984 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39993 arg "layout-paragraph"
40001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40007 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40009 \begin_inset space ~
40018 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40027 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40041 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40055 \begin_layout Subsection
40056 View/Update Toolbar
40057 \begin_inset Index idx
40060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40061 Toolbar ! View / Update
40069 \begin_layout Standard
40070 \begin_inset Graphics
40071 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40078 \begin_layout Standard
40079 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40085 \begin_layout Standard
40086 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40090 \begin_layout Standard
40091 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40097 \begin_layout Standard
40098 \begin_inset Tabular
40099 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40100 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40101 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40102 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40103 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40133 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40142 arg "buffer-update"
40150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40156 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40163 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40172 arg "master-buffer-view"
40180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40186 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40188 \begin_inset space ~
40197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40206 arg "master-buffer-update"
40214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40220 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40222 \begin_inset space ~
40226 \begin_inset space ~
40235 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40244 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40259 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40260 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40261 Synchronize with Output
40267 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40290 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40291 View (Other Formats)
40297 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40304 arg "update-others"
40312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40318 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40319 Update (Other Formats)
40332 \begin_layout Standard
40333 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40337 \begin_layout Subsection
40341 \begin_layout Standard
40342 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40343 \begin_inset space ~
40347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40349 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40353 , the table toolbar
40354 \begin_inset Index idx
40357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40366 \begin_inset space ~
40371 manual and the math macro toolbar
40372 \begin_inset Index idx
40375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40388 \begin_layout Chapter
40389 The Document Settings
40390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40392 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40397 \begin_inset Index idx
40400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40401 Document ! Settings
40409 \begin_layout Standard
40413 \begin_inset space ~
40418 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40419 is called with the menu
40421 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40425 You can save your document settings as default with the
40427 Save as Document Defaults
40429 button in any dialog.
40430 This will create a template named
40434 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40435 when you create a new document without
40439 \begin_layout Standard
40444 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40445 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40448 \begin_layout Standard
40449 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40450 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40451 to find the one you are looking for.
40452 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40453 the submenus of the dialog.
40455 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40459 \begin_inset space \space{}
40463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40470 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40471 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40472 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40475 \begin_layout Section
40479 \begin_layout Standard
40480 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40482 Document classes are described in section
40483 \begin_inset space ~
40487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40489 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40497 \begin_layout Standard
40501 \begin_inset space ~
40506 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40511 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40512 as a layout for a document class.
40513 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40515 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40524 \begin_layout Standard
40525 Some classes use special class options by default.
40526 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40530 and you can decide to use them or not.
40531 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40532 recommended you leave them untouched.
40537 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40538 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40543 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40545 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40551 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40552 \begin_inset Newline newline
40557 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40560 \begin_inset Newline newline
40563 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40564 distribution, see section
40569 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40571 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40583 \begin_layout Standard
40588 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40589 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40590 in the background if the child document
40591 is opened without its master.
40592 This way child documents are always compilable.
40593 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40600 \begin_inset space ~
40608 \begin_layout Standard
40609 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40620 \begin_inset Index idx
40623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40625 -packages ! prettyref
40631 \begin_inset Index idx
40634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40636 -packages ! refstyle
40641 for cross-references, see section
40642 \begin_inset space ~
40646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40648 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40655 \begin_layout Section
40659 \begin_layout Standard
40660 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40661 Please refer to the section
40664 \begin_inset space ~
40672 \begin_inset space ~
40677 manual for details.
40680 \begin_layout Section
40684 \begin_layout Standard
40685 Modules are explained in section
40686 \begin_inset space ~
40690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40692 reference "subsec:Modules"
40699 \begin_layout Section
40703 \begin_layout Standard
40705 \begin_inset space ~
40709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40711 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40718 \begin_layout Section
40722 \begin_layout Standard
40723 The document font settings are described in section
40724 \begin_inset space ~
40728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40730 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40737 \begin_layout Section
40741 \begin_layout Standard
40742 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40754 \begin_inset space ~
40759 and whether it should be a
40762 \begin_inset space ~
40767 can also be specified here.
40770 \begin_layout Standard
40771 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40772 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40773 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40775 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40778 \begin_layout Standard
40781 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40784 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40785 justifies the text on screen.
40786 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40790 \begin_layout Section
40794 \begin_layout Standard
40795 This dialog is described in sections
40796 \begin_inset space ~
40800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40802 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40809 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40816 \begin_layout Section
40820 \begin_layout Standard
40821 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40822 \begin_inset space ~
40826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40828 reference "subsec:Margins"
40835 \begin_layout Section
40837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40839 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40844 \begin_inset Index idx
40847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40848 Language ! Encoding
40856 \begin_layout Standard
40857 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40858 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40859 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40861 is always encoded in utf8).
40862 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40863 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40864 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40865 -command is not known for
40866 a particular character).
40869 \begin_layout Standard
40870 If you use the option
40875 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40876 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40877 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40879 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40880 exactly one encoding.
40881 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40884 \begin_layout Standard
40886 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40887 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40888 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40889 installation supports Unicode), choose
40890 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40891 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40892 is quite incomplete, so
40893 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40898 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40899 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40900 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40901 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40902 -commands is not used, because all
40903 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40904 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40905 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40906 , two new alternative engines
40907 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40909 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40911 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40914 \begin_inset space ~
40922 \begin_inset space ~
40930 \begin_inset space ~
40936 \begin_inset space ~
40940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40942 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40947 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40951 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40954 \begin_layout Standard
40958 \begin_inset space ~
40963 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40964 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40974 The possible settings are:
40977 \begin_layout Description
40978 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40980 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40981 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40985 \begin_inset space ~
40989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40991 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40998 \begin_layout Description
40999 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41000 format you will use.
41001 In many cases this will be
41006 \begin_inset Index idx
41009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41017 If the newer package
41022 \begin_inset Index idx
41025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41027 -packages ! polyglossia
41032 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41033 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41034 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41036 this package will be used instead of
41043 \begin_layout Description
41045 \begin_inset space ~
41056 would be more appropriate.
41059 \begin_layout Description
41060 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41061 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41065 (for German texts), type in
41068 \begin_inset Newline newline
41073 usepackage{ngerman}
41076 \begin_layout Description
41077 None will not use a language package.
41078 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41081 \begin_layout Standard
41082 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41085 \begin_layout Description
41087 \begin_inset space ~
41091 \begin_inset space ~
41095 \begin_inset space ~
41102 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41108 \begin_inset Index idx
41111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41113 -packages ! inputenc
41119 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41120 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41121 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41125 \begin_layout Description
41126 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41128 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41129 commands, which may result in a big
41130 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41131 -commands are needed.
41134 \begin_layout Description
41136 \begin_inset space ~
41140 \begin_inset space ~
41143 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41146 \begin_layout Description
41148 \begin_inset space ~
41152 \begin_inset space ~
41155 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41158 \begin_layout Description
41160 \begin_inset space ~
41163 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41166 \begin_layout Description
41168 \begin_inset space ~
41172 \begin_inset space ~
41175 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41176 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41179 \begin_layout Description
41181 \begin_inset space ~
41185 \begin_inset space ~
41188 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41192 \begin_layout Description
41194 \begin_inset space ~
41198 \begin_inset space ~
41201 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41202 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41205 \begin_layout Description
41207 \begin_inset space ~
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41215 \begin_inset space ~
41218 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41219 \begin_inset space ~
41225 \begin_layout Description
41227 \begin_inset space ~
41231 \begin_inset space ~
41235 \begin_inset space ~
41238 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41239 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41242 \begin_layout Description
41244 \begin_inset space ~
41248 \begin_inset space ~
41251 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41252 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41253 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41254 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41255 \begin_inset space ~
41259 \begin_inset space ~
41265 \begin_layout Description
41267 \begin_inset space ~
41271 \begin_inset space ~
41274 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41275 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41276 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41278 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41279 \begin_inset space ~
41283 \begin_inset space ~
41289 \begin_layout Description
41291 \begin_inset space ~
41295 \begin_inset space ~
41298 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41301 \begin_layout Description
41303 \begin_inset space ~
41307 \begin_inset space ~
41310 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41313 \begin_layout Description
41315 \begin_inset space ~
41319 \begin_inset space ~
41322 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41325 \begin_layout Description
41327 \begin_inset space ~
41330 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41333 \begin_layout Description
41335 \begin_inset space ~
41338 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41341 \begin_layout Description
41343 \begin_inset space ~
41347 \begin_inset space ~
41350 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41353 \begin_layout Description
41355 \begin_inset space ~
41359 \begin_inset space ~
41365 \begin_layout Description
41367 \begin_inset space ~
41371 \begin_inset space ~
41374 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41377 \begin_layout Description
41379 \begin_inset space ~
41383 \begin_inset space ~
41389 \begin_layout Description
41391 \begin_inset space ~
41395 \begin_inset space ~
41398 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41404 \begin_inset Index idx
41407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41414 , when using this, set the document language to
41419 \begin_layout Description
41421 \begin_inset space ~
41425 \begin_inset space ~
41428 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41433 , when using this, set the document language to
41436 \begin_inset space ~
41442 \begin_layout Description
41444 \begin_inset space ~
41448 \begin_inset space ~
41451 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41457 \begin_inset Index idx
41460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41462 -packages ! japanese
41467 , when using this, set the document language to
41472 \begin_layout Description
41474 \begin_inset space ~
41478 \begin_inset space ~
41481 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41486 , when using this, set the document language to
41491 \begin_layout Description
41493 \begin_inset space ~
41497 \begin_inset space ~
41500 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41505 , when using this, set the document language to
41510 \begin_layout Description
41512 \begin_inset space ~
41515 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41518 \begin_layout Description
41520 \begin_inset space ~
41524 \begin_inset space ~
41528 \begin_inset space ~
41531 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41534 \begin_layout Description
41536 \begin_inset space ~
41540 \begin_inset space ~
41544 \begin_inset space ~
41547 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41548 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41549 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41552 \begin_layout Description
41554 \begin_inset space ~
41558 \begin_inset space ~
41564 \begin_layout Description
41566 \begin_inset space ~
41570 \begin_inset space ~
41573 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41574 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41577 \begin_layout Description
41579 \begin_inset space ~
41583 \begin_inset space ~
41586 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41592 \begin_inset Index idx
41595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41602 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41605 \begin_layout Description
41607 \begin_inset space ~
41615 \begin_inset space ~
41618 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41625 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41628 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41635 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41636 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41638 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41641 \begin_layout Description
41643 \begin_inset space ~
41647 \begin_inset space ~
41650 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41656 \begin_inset Index idx
41659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41666 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41669 \begin_layout Description
41671 \begin_inset space ~
41674 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41680 \begin_inset Index idx
41683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41685 -packages ! inputenc
41691 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41695 \begin_layout Description
41697 \begin_inset space ~
41701 \begin_inset space ~
41705 \begin_inset space ~
41708 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41709 \begin_inset space ~
41715 \begin_layout Description
41717 \begin_inset space ~
41721 \begin_inset space ~
41725 \begin_inset space ~
41728 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41729 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41730 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41734 \begin_layout Description
41736 \begin_inset space ~
41740 \begin_inset space ~
41744 \begin_inset space ~
41747 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41748 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41751 \begin_layout Section
41753 \begin_inset Index idx
41756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41763 \begin_inset Index idx
41766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41773 \begin_inset Index idx
41776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41777 Color ! Shaded boxes
41783 \begin_inset Index idx
41786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41787 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41795 \begin_layout Standard
41796 Here you can alter the font color for the
41800 (default: black), for
41803 \begin_inset space ~
41808 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41812 (default: white) and for
41815 \begin_inset space ~
41825 sets the color back to the default.
41828 \begin_layout Standard
41829 Clicking any button showing
41837 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41838 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41839 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41840 later more quickly.
41843 \begin_layout Standard
41844 Note, if you change the
41847 \begin_inset space ~
41852 font color and use the option
41855 \begin_inset space ~
41860 in the document settings under
41863 \begin_inset space ~
41868 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41869 \begin_inset space ~
41873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41875 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41882 \begin_layout Standard
41883 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41889 \begin_layout Standard
41893 \begin_inset space ~
41902 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41905 \begin_inset space ~
41908 Code after a forced page break:
41911 \begin_layout Itemize
41912 For the page color:
41913 \begin_inset Newline newline
41920 pagecolor{color name}
41923 \begin_layout Itemize
41924 For the text color:
41925 \begin_inset Newline newline
41935 \begin_layout Standard
41936 You are restricted to one of
41972 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41979 \begin_inset space ~
41985 \begin_inset Newline newline
41988 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41989 names to refer to them:
41992 \begin_layout Itemize
41998 \begin_inset Newline newline
42003 page_backgroundcolor
42006 \begin_layout Itemize
42010 \begin_inset space ~
42016 \begin_inset Newline newline
42024 \begin_layout Itemize
42028 \begin_inset space ~
42034 \begin_inset Newline newline
42042 \begin_layout Itemize
42046 \begin_inset space ~
42052 \begin_inset Newline newline
42060 \begin_layout Standard
42061 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42064 \begin_inset space ~
42072 \begin_inset space ~
42080 \begin_layout Section
42084 \begin_layout Standard
42085 Here you can adjust the
42089 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42093 as described in section
42094 \begin_inset space ~
42098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42100 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42107 \begin_layout Section
42111 \begin_layout Standard
42112 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42118 \begin_inset Index idx
42121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42133 \begin_inset Index idx
42136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42138 -packages ! jurabib
42146 Sectioned bibliography
42148 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42154 \begin_inset Index idx
42157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42159 -packages ! bibtopic
42164 and you can select a
42168 for the generation of the bibliography.
42169 For a further description see section
42170 \begin_inset space ~
42174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42176 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42183 \begin_layout Section
42187 \begin_layout Standard
42188 Here you can define the
42192 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42194 \begin_inset space ~
42198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42200 reference "sec:Index"
42207 \begin_layout Section
42211 \begin_layout Standard
42212 The PDF properties are explained in section
42213 \begin_inset space ~
42217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42219 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42226 \begin_layout Section
42230 \begin_layout Standard
42231 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42232 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42238 \begin_inset Index idx
42241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42243 -packages ! amsmath
42253 \begin_inset Index idx
42256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42258 -packages ! amssymb
42268 \begin_inset Index idx
42271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42283 \begin_inset Index idx
42286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42298 \begin_inset Index idx
42301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42303 -packages ! mathdots
42313 \begin_inset Index idx
42316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42318 -packages ! mathtools
42328 \begin_inset Index idx
42331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42343 \begin_inset Index idx
42346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42348 -packages ! stackrel
42358 \begin_inset Index idx
42361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42363 -packages ! stmaryrd
42373 \begin_inset Index idx
42376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42378 -packages ! undertilde
42383 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42386 \begin_layout Description
42387 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42388 -errors in formulas,
42389 ensure that you have this enabled.
42392 \begin_layout Description
42393 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42394 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42395 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42399 \begin_layout Description
42400 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42403 \begin_inset space ~
42415 \begin_layout Description
42416 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42419 \begin_inset space ~
42431 \begin_layout Description
42432 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42443 \begin_layout Description
42444 mathtools is used for the math commands
42480 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42487 \begin_layout Description
42488 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42490 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42499 \begin_layout Description
42500 stackrel is used for the math command
42517 \begin_layout Description
42518 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42521 \begin_layout Description
42522 undertilde is used for the math command
42530 Accents for one Character
42539 \begin_layout Section
42543 \begin_layout Standard
42544 The float placement options are described in the section
42547 \begin_inset space ~
42555 \begin_inset space ~
42563 \begin_layout Section
42567 \begin_layout Standard
42568 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42570 Program Code Listings
42575 \begin_inset space ~
42583 \begin_layout Section
42587 \begin_layout Standard
42588 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42596 set to be used and set the
42601 The itemize environment is described in section
42602 \begin_inset space ~
42606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42608 reference "sec:Itemize"
42615 \begin_layout Standard
42616 You can furthermore specify a
42619 \begin_inset space ~
42624 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42625 command of the desired character.
42626 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42633 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42639 \begin_inset space \space{}
42643 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42653 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42654 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42657 \begin_layout Standard
42658 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42666 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42667 -packages in the preamble (menu
42670 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42671 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42674 \begin_inset space ~
42680 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42684 usepackage{textcomp}
42687 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42691 usepackage{amssymb}
42701 \begin_layout Section
42705 \begin_layout Standard
42706 Branches are described in section
42707 \begin_inset space ~
42711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42713 reference "sec:Branches"
42720 \begin_layout Section
42722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42724 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42731 \begin_layout Standard
42732 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42735 \begin_layout Description
42737 \begin_inset space ~
42741 \begin_inset space ~
42744 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42764 View Master Document
42765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42772 Update Master Document
42773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42780 menu or the toolbar.
42781 The default is set in
42783 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42784 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42786 \begin_inset space ~
42789 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42793 \begin_inset space ~
42797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42799 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42806 \begin_layout Description
42808 \begin_inset space ~
42812 \begin_inset space ~
42815 Output settings for the menu
42817 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42819 \begin_inset space ~
42825 For a detailed description see section
42827 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42832 \begin_inset space ~
42840 \begin_layout Description
42842 \begin_inset space ~
42846 \begin_inset space ~
42849 Options offers settings for the export format
42857 \begin_inset space ~
42862 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42863 \begin_inset space ~
42866 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42870 \begin_inset space ~
42875 settings are described in detail in section
42877 Math Output in XHTML
42882 \begin_inset space ~
42891 \begin_inset space ~
42895 \begin_inset space ~
42900 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42903 \begin_layout Section
42911 \begin_layout Standard
42912 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42914 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42916 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42918 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42922 \begin_layout Standard
42923 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42924 -syntax is given in section
42925 \begin_inset space ~
42929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42931 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42938 \begin_layout Chapter
42944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42946 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42951 \begin_inset Index idx
42954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42963 \begin_layout Standard
42964 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42966 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42970 It has the following submenus.
42973 \begin_layout Section
42977 \begin_layout Subsection
42981 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42982 User Interface File
42983 \begin_inset Index idx
42986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42987 Customization ! of toolbars
42993 \begin_inset Index idx
42996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42997 Customization ! of menus
43005 \begin_layout Standard
43006 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43007 interface (ui) file.
43008 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43016 \begin_layout Description
43021 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43024 \begin_layout Description
43031 the menu entries in popup context menus
43034 \begin_layout Description
43039 specifies the toolbar buttons
43042 \begin_layout Standard
43043 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43044 and edit the entries.
43047 \begin_layout Standard
43048 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43060 entries must be finished with an explicit
43085 and in the case of the
43086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43098 The syntax for the entries is:
43101 \begin_layout Standard
43102 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43131 \begin_layout Standard
43133 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43136 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43137 -functions are listed in the menu
43139 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43141 \begin_inset space ~
43149 \begin_layout Standard
43150 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43156 \begin_layout Standard
43157 For example, assuming you use the menu
43159 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43162 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43166 \begin_layout Standard
43167 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43191 \begin_layout Standard
43193 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43208 to have the sixth bookmark.
43211 \begin_layout Standard
43215 \begin_inset space ~
43220 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43221 's toolbar buttons.
43222 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43223 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43226 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43233 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43237 \begin_layout Standard
43240 Enable tool tips in main work area
43242 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43246 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43250 \begin_layout Standard
43255 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43256 should display in the menu
43258 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43260 \begin_inset space ~
43268 \begin_layout Subsection
43272 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43276 \begin_layout Standard
43279 Restore window layouts and geometries
43282 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43283 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43287 \begin_layout Standard
43290 Restore cursor positions
43292 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43296 \begin_layout Standard
43299 Load opened files from last session
43301 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43305 \begin_layout Standard
43308 Clear all session information
43310 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43311 sessions (cursor positions, names
43312 of last opened documents, etc.).
43315 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43319 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43324 \begin_inset Index idx
43327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43336 \begin_layout Standard
43339 Backup original documents when saving
43341 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43342 it was saved the last time.
43343 It is stored in the
43346 \begin_inset space ~
43352 \begin_inset space ~
43356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43358 reference "sec:Paths"
43362 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43365 \begin_inset space ~
43371 The backup file has the file extension
43372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43386 \begin_layout Standard
43389 Backup documents, every
43391 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43394 \begin_layout Standard
43397 Save documents compressed by default
43399 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43400 \begin_inset space ~
43404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43406 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43411 This applies to newly created documents only.
43412 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43415 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43416 Windows & work area
43419 \begin_layout Standard
43422 Open documents in tabs
43424 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43428 \begin_layout Standard
43433 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43440 \begin_inset space ~
43444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43446 reference "sec:Paths"
43450 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43457 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43458 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43459 of \SpecialChar LyX
43461 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43462 instance is created for each file.
43465 \begin_layout Standard
43468 Single close-tab button
43470 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43480 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43481 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43484 \begin_layout Standard
43485 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43493 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43494 before the change takes effect.
43502 \begin_layout Standard
43507 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43509 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43511 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43515 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43516 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43517 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43520 \begin_layout Subsection
43522 \begin_inset Index idx
43525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43534 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43541 \begin_layout Standard
43542 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43546 \begin_layout Standard
43547 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43555 This section only deals with the fonts
43559 the \SpecialChar LyX
43561 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43564 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43565 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43576 \begin_layout Standard
43577 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43594 (depends on the system) as its
43597 \begin_inset space ~
43613 \begin_layout Standard
43614 You can change the font size with the
43621 \begin_layout Standard
43626 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43631 points have the size of 1
43632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43636 \begin_inset space ~
43640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43642 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43647 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43652 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43653 \begin_inset space ~
43657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43659 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43666 \begin_layout Standard
43669 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43671 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43672 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43673 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43674 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43675 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43677 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43678 \begin_inset space ~
43684 \begin_layout Subsection
43686 \begin_inset Index idx
43689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43690 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43697 \begin_inset Index idx
43700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43709 \begin_layout Standard
43710 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43711 by choosing an item in the
43712 list and selecting the
43719 \begin_layout Standard
43720 By checking the option
43724 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43727 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43728 \begin_inset space ~
43732 \begin_inset space ~
43737 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43740 \begin_layout Subsection
43742 \begin_inset Index idx
43745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43754 \begin_layout Standard
43755 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43759 \begin_layout Standard
43764 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43765 This feature is described in section
43766 \begin_inset space ~
43770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43772 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43779 \begin_layout Standard
43780 Checking the option
43783 \begin_inset space ~
43787 \begin_inset space ~
43791 \begin_inset space ~
43796 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43799 \begin_layout Section
43801 \begin_inset Index idx
43804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43813 \begin_layout Subsection
43817 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43821 \begin_layout Standard
43824 Cursor follows scrollbar
43826 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43830 \begin_layout Standard
43831 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43832 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43833 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43836 \begin_layout Standard
43839 Scroll below end of document
43841 is self-explanatory.
43844 \begin_layout Standard
43845 In \SpecialChar LyX
43846 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43853 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43855 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43856 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43859 \begin_layout Standard
43862 Sort environments alphabetically
43864 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43867 \begin_layout Standard
43870 Group environments by their category
43872 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43875 \begin_layout Standard
43880 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43891 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43895 \begin_layout Standard
43896 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43901 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43902 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43906 \begin_layout Subsection
43908 \begin_inset Index idx
43911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43918 \begin_inset Index idx
43921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43922 Settings ! Shortcuts
43930 \begin_layout Standard
43935 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43937 Several binding files are available, among them:
43940 \begin_layout Description
43941 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43944 \begin_layout Description
43945 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43957 \begin_layout Description
43958 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43969 \begin_layout Standard
43970 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43975 , and binding files for special languages.
43976 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43981 \begin_inset space \space{}
43985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43993 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43994 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43995 will try to use the appropriate binding
43999 \begin_layout Standard
44000 Some binding files, like
44004 , only have a limited scope.
44005 When looking at the end of the file
44009 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44012 \begin_layout Standard
44016 \begin_inset space ~
44020 \begin_inset space ~
44025 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44026 in the selected key binding file.
44029 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44033 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44038 \begin_inset Index idx
44041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44042 Key Bindings ! Editing
44050 \begin_layout Standard
44051 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44052 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44053 functions and the bound shortcuts.
44054 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44057 Show key-bindings containing
44060 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44061 Insert there for example as keyword
44062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44069 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44070 functions that contain
44071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44079 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44080 All \SpecialChar LyX
44081 functions are also listed in the file
44086 that you will find in the
44093 \begin_layout Standard
44094 For example, to add the shortcut
44102 , select the function and press the
44107 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44108 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44111 \begin_layout Standard
44112 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44113 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44115 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44116 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44118 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44123 \begin_layout Standard
44124 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44127 \begin_layout Standard
44128 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44130 The syntax of the entries is:
44133 \begin_layout Standard
44139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44158 \begin_layout Subsection
44160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44162 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44167 \begin_inset Index idx
44170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44177 \begin_inset Index idx
44180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44181 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44189 \begin_layout Standard
44190 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44191 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44192 provides keyboard maps.
44193 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44194 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44197 \begin_inset space ~
44201 \begin_inset space ~
44206 and select the keyboard map file named
44213 \begin_layout Standard
44222 keyboard map and, if you use the
44226 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44229 arg "keymap-primary"
44235 arg "keymap-secondary"
44238 respectively or toggle between them with
44241 arg "keymap-toggle"
44247 \begin_layout Standard
44248 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44256 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44265 \begin_layout Standard
44266 You can also specify the mouse
44268 Wheel scrolling speed
44271 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44275 Middle mouse button pasting
44277 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44278 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44281 \begin_layout Standard
44289 \begin_inset space ~
44293 \begin_inset space ~
44298 you can select a key for zooming.
44299 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44302 \begin_layout Subsection
44306 \begin_layout Standard
44307 Input completion is described in section
44308 \begin_inset space ~
44312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44314 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44321 \begin_layout Section
44323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44330 \begin_inset Index idx
44333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44340 \begin_inset Index idx
44343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44352 \begin_layout Standard
44353 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44354 are normally determined during
44356 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44359 \begin_layout Description
44361 \begin_inset space ~
44364 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44365 's working directory.
44366 It is the default when you
44377 \begin_inset space ~
44385 \begin_layout Description
44387 \begin_inset space ~
44390 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44392 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44394 \begin_inset space ~
44398 \begin_inset space ~
44406 \begin_layout Description
44408 \begin_inset space ~
44411 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44417 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44421 \begin_inset Newline newline
44425 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44437 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44438 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44446 \begin_layout Description
44448 \begin_inset space ~
44452 \begin_inset Index idx
44455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44461 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44462 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44463 \begin_inset space ~
44467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44469 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44477 will be used to save the backups.
44478 \begin_inset Newline newline
44481 Backup files have the ending
44482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44492 \begin_layout Description
44494 \begin_inset space ~
44497 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44498 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44500 \begin_inset Newline newline
44507 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44513 You can edit this file with the program
44522 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44523 in its preferences under
44526 \begin_inset space ~
44532 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44537 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44539 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44540 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44546 and \SpecialChar LyX
44547 need to be running the same time.
44548 \begin_inset Newline newline
44551 The pipe is also used for the
44555 feature, see section
44556 \begin_inset space ~
44560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44562 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44567 \begin_inset Newline newline
44570 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44571 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44572 \begin_inset Newline newline
44588 \begin_layout Description
44590 \begin_inset space ~
44593 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44596 \begin_layout Description
44598 \begin_inset space ~
44601 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44602 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44603 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44606 \begin_layout Description
44608 \begin_inset space ~
44611 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44617 You only need to specify it if you are using
44621 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44623 For \SpecialChar LyX
44628 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44632 \begin_layout Description
44634 \begin_inset space ~
44637 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44638 When \SpecialChar LyX
44639 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44640 to find it on the system.
44641 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44643 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44645 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44652 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44653 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44656 \begin_layout Description
44658 \begin_inset space ~
44661 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44662 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44663 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44664 code or in the document
44666 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44668 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44669 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44670 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44671 scanned for the input files.
44672 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44673 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44675 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44676 compilation may fail for some documents.
44679 \begin_layout Section
44683 \begin_layout Standard
44684 Here you can insert your
44693 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44695 \begin_inset space ~
44699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44701 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44705 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44708 \begin_layout Section
44710 \begin_inset Index idx
44713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44714 Language ! Settings
44720 \begin_inset Index idx
44723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44724 Settings ! Language
44732 \begin_layout Subsection
44734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44736 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44743 \begin_layout Description
44745 \begin_inset space ~
44749 \begin_inset space ~
44752 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44754 You can find its actual translation status here:
44755 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44757 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44764 \begin_layout Description
44766 \begin_inset space ~
44769 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44770 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44771 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44772 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44789 The most widespread language package is
44794 \begin_inset Index idx
44797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44804 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44806 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44807 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44808 come with the alternative
44814 \begin_inset Index idx
44817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44819 -packages ! polyglossia
44824 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44825 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44831 The available selections are described in section
44832 \begin_inset space ~
44836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44838 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44845 \begin_layout Description
44847 \begin_inset space ~
44850 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44851 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44852 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44853 An example is the start command
44859 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44861 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44865 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44880 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44885 \begin_layout Description
44887 \begin_inset space ~
44895 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44896 command toggles the package on and off.
44899 \begin_layout Description
44901 \begin_inset space ~
44905 \begin_inset space ~
44908 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44912 \begin_layout Description
44914 \begin_inset space ~
44918 \begin_inset space ~
44921 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44925 \begin_layout Description
44927 \begin_inset space ~
44931 \begin_inset space ~
44934 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44935 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44936 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44938 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44945 \begin_layout Description
44947 \begin_inset space ~
44950 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44952 When this option is not set, the
44955 \begin_inset space ~
44960 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44962 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44965 \begin_inset space ~
44973 \begin_layout Description
44975 \begin_inset space ~
44981 \begin_inset space ~
44987 When it is not set, the
44990 \begin_inset space ~
44995 is set to the end of the document.
44998 \begin_layout Description
45000 \begin_inset space ~
45004 \begin_inset space ~
45007 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45008 language will be underlined in blue.
45011 \begin_layout Description
45013 \begin_inset space ~
45017 \begin_inset space ~
45020 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45021 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45024 \begin_layout Description
45026 \begin_inset space ~
45029 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45030 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45031 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45032 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45035 \begin_layout Subsection
45039 \begin_layout Standard
45040 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45041 \begin_inset space ~
45045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45047 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45054 \begin_layout Section
45058 \begin_layout Subsection
45060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45062 name "subsec:General-output"
45069 \begin_layout Description
45071 \begin_inset space ~
45074 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45076 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45078 \begin_inset space ~
45084 For a detailed description see section
45086 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45091 \begin_inset space ~
45099 \begin_layout Description
45101 \begin_inset space ~
45104 Options Options for the program
45108 that is used for the export format
45113 \begin_inset space ~
45117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45119 reference "subsec:Export"
45124 Possible options are listed in the
45129 \begin_inset Newline newline
45133 \begin_inset Flex URL
45136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45138 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
45148 \begin_layout Description
45150 \begin_inset space ~
45154 \begin_inset space ~
45157 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45160 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45161 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45163 \begin_inset space ~
45169 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45172 \begin_layout Description
45174 \begin_inset space ~
45178 \begin_inset Index idx
45181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45188 \begin_inset Index idx
45191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45192 Settings ! Date format
45197 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45198 \begin_inset Newline newline
45202 \begin_inset Flex URL
45205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45207 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
45213 \begin_inset Newline newline
45216 For example the format
45217 \begin_inset Newline newline
45221 \begin_inset Newline newline
45224 prints the date as day/month/year.
45227 \begin_layout Description
45229 \begin_inset space ~
45233 \begin_inset space ~
45236 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45237 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45240 \begin_layout Subsection
45246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45248 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45253 \begin_inset Index idx
45256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45257 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45266 \begin_layout Description
45268 \begin_inset space ~
45276 \begin_inset space ~
45280 \begin_inset space ~
45283 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45288 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45309 are used for Cyrillic.
45310 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45323 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45325 sets up in the background.
45326 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45329 \begin_layout Description
45331 \begin_inset space ~
45335 \begin_inset space ~
45339 \begin_inset space ~
45343 \begin_inset space ~
45346 options They only have an effect when the program
45350 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45353 \begin_layout Standard
45354 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45355 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45356 manuals of the applications.
45359 \begin_layout Description
45361 \begin_inset space ~
45364 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45365 \begin_inset space ~
45369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45371 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45378 \begin_layout Description
45380 \begin_inset space ~
45383 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45384 \begin_inset space ~
45388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45390 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45397 \begin_layout Description
45399 \begin_inset space ~
45402 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45403 \begin_inset space ~
45407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45409 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45416 \begin_layout Description
45422 \begin_inset space ~
45425 command Command for the program
45427 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45430 that is described in the section
45432 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45437 Additional Features
45442 \begin_layout Standard
45443 There are additionally the following options:
45446 \begin_layout Description
45448 \begin_inset space ~
45452 \begin_inset space ~
45456 \begin_inset space ~
45460 \begin_inset space ~
45465 \begin_inset space ~
45468 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45486 to separate folders.
45487 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45489 \begin_inset Index idx
45492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45499 \begin_inset Index idx
45502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45511 \begin_layout Description
45513 \begin_inset space ~
45517 \begin_inset space ~
45521 \begin_inset space ~
45525 \begin_inset space ~
45529 \begin_inset space ~
45533 \begin_inset space ~
45536 changes Removes all manually set
45542 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45543 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45545 \begin_inset space ~
45550 dialog when changing the document class.
45553 \begin_layout Section
45555 \begin_inset space ~
45559 \begin_inset Index idx
45562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45571 \begin_layout Subsection
45573 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45575 name "subsec:Converters"
45580 \begin_inset Index idx
45583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45592 \begin_layout Standard
45593 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45594 from one format to another.
45595 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45596 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45603 \begin_inset space ~
45608 field and press the
45613 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45617 \begin_inset space ~
45622 drop-down list, modify the
45626 field and press the
45633 \begin_layout Standard
45636 Converter File Cache
45642 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45644 Maximum Age (in days
45647 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45648 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45651 \begin_layout Standard
45652 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45653 definition, is described in the section
45664 \begin_layout Subsection
45666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45668 name "sec:File-Formats"
45673 \begin_inset Index idx
45676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45683 \begin_inset Index idx
45686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45695 \begin_layout Standard
45696 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45706 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45709 \begin_layout Standard
45710 You can also define the
45712 Default output format
45714 that is used when you use
45716 View, Update, View Master Document
45720 Update Master Document
45726 menu or the toolbar.
45729 \begin_layout Standard
45730 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45741 \begin_layout Standard
45742 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45744 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45745 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45746 This is done by specifying a
45751 More about this is described in the section
45762 \begin_layout Chapter
45763 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45765 \begin_inset Index idx
45768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45777 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45784 \begin_layout Standard
45786 \begin_inset space ~
45790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45792 reference "tab:Units"
45796 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45797 and used in this documentation.
45800 \begin_layout Standard
45801 \begin_inset Float table
45807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45808 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45826 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45834 \begin_inset Tabular
45835 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45836 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45837 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45838 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45839 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46045 scaled point (65536
46046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46124 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46197 % of original image width
46202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46513 \begin_layout Chapter
46515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46517 name "chap:Credits"
46524 \begin_layout Standard
46525 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46526 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46529 \begin_layout Itemize
46532 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46535 \begin_layout Itemize
46541 \begin_layout Itemize
46547 \begin_layout Itemize
46553 \begin_layout Itemize
46559 \begin_layout Itemize
46565 \begin_layout Itemize
46571 \begin_layout Itemize
46577 \begin_layout Itemize
46580 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46583 \begin_layout Itemize
46589 \begin_layout Itemize
46595 \begin_layout Itemize
46601 \begin_layout Itemize
46607 \begin_layout Itemize
46613 \begin_layout Itemize
46619 \begin_layout Itemize
46625 \begin_layout Itemize
46631 \begin_layout Itemize
46632 The \SpecialChar LyX
46634 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46643 \begin_layout Standard
46644 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46647 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46654 \begin_layout Bibliography
46655 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46656 LatexCommand bibitem
46662 The \SpecialChar LyX
46664 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46667 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46672 \begin_inset Newline newline
46676 \begin_inset Flex URL
46679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46681 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46689 \begin_layout Bibliography
46690 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46691 LatexCommand bibitem
46692 key "latexcompanion"
46696 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46698 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46699 Companion Second Edition.
46702 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46705 \begin_layout Bibliography
46706 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46707 LatexCommand bibitem
46712 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46715 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46719 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46722 \begin_layout Bibliography
46723 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46724 LatexCommand bibitem
46732 : A Document Preparation System.
46735 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46738 \begin_layout Bibliography
46739 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46740 LatexCommand bibitem
46749 The \SpecialChar TeX
46753 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46756 \begin_layout Bibliography
46757 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46758 LatexCommand bibitem
46763 The \SpecialChar TeX
46765 \begin_inset Newline newline
46769 \begin_inset Flex URL
46772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46774 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46782 \begin_layout Bibliography
46783 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46784 LatexCommand bibitem
46789 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46791 \begin_inset Newline newline
46795 \begin_inset Flex URL
46798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46800 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46808 \begin_layout Bibliography
46809 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46810 LatexCommand bibitem
46816 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46818 name "Documentation"
46819 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46825 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46829 \begin_inset Newline newline
46833 \begin_inset Flex URL
46836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46838 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46846 \begin_layout Bibliography
46847 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46848 LatexCommand bibitem
46854 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46856 name "Documentation"
46857 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46861 how to use the program
46863 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46867 \begin_inset Newline newline
46871 \begin_inset Flex URL
46874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46876 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46884 \begin_layout Bibliography
46885 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46886 LatexCommand bibitem
46892 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46894 name "Documentation"
46895 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46904 \begin_inset Newline newline
46908 \begin_inset Flex URL
46911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46913 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46921 \begin_layout Bibliography
46922 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46923 LatexCommand bibitem
46924 key "makeindex-man"
46929 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46932 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46941 \begin_inset Newline newline
46945 \begin_inset Flex URL
46948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46950 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46958 \begin_layout Bibliography
46959 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46960 LatexCommand bibitem
46966 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46968 name "Documentation"
46969 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46978 \begin_inset Newline newline
46982 \begin_inset Flex URL
46985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46987 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46995 \begin_layout Bibliography
46996 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46997 LatexCommand bibitem
47003 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47005 name "Documentation"
47006 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47010 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47012 \begin_inset Newline newline
47016 \begin_inset Flex URL
47019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47021 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47029 \begin_layout Bibliography
47030 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47031 LatexCommand bibitem
47037 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47039 name "Documentation"
47040 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47044 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47050 \begin_inset Index idx
47053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47055 -packages ! caption
47061 \begin_inset Newline newline
47065 \begin_inset Flex URL
47068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47070 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47078 \begin_layout Bibliography
47079 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47080 LatexCommand bibitem
47086 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47088 name "Documentation"
47089 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47093 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47099 \begin_inset Index idx
47102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47104 -packages ! enumitem
47110 \begin_inset Newline newline
47114 \begin_inset Flex URL
47117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47119 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47127 \begin_layout Bibliography
47128 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47129 LatexCommand bibitem
47135 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47137 name "Documentation"
47138 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47142 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47148 \begin_inset Index idx
47151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47153 -packages ! fancyhdr
47159 \begin_inset Newline newline
47163 \begin_inset Flex URL
47166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47168 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47176 \begin_layout Bibliography
47177 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47178 LatexCommand bibitem
47184 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47186 name "Documentation"
47187 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47191 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47197 \begin_inset Index idx
47200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47202 -packages ! hyperref
47208 \begin_inset Newline newline
47212 \begin_inset Flex URL
47215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47217 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47225 \begin_layout Bibliography
47226 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47227 LatexCommand bibitem
47233 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47235 name "Documentation"
47236 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47240 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47246 \begin_inset Index idx
47249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47251 -packages ! nomencl
47257 \begin_inset Newline newline
47261 \begin_inset Flex URL
47264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47266 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47274 \begin_layout Bibliography
47275 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47276 LatexCommand bibitem
47282 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47284 name "Documentation"
47285 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47289 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47295 \begin_inset Index idx
47298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47300 -packages ! prettyref
47306 \begin_inset Newline newline
47310 \begin_inset Flex URL
47313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47315 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47323 \begin_layout Bibliography
47324 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47325 LatexCommand bibitem
47331 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47333 name "Documentation"
47334 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47338 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47344 \begin_inset Index idx
47347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47349 -packages ! refstyle
47355 \begin_inset Newline newline
47359 \begin_inset Flex URL
47362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47364 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47372 \begin_layout Bibliography
47373 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47374 LatexCommand bibitem
47380 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47383 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47387 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47389 \begin_inset Newline newline
47393 \begin_inset Flex URL
47396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47398 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47406 \begin_layout Bibliography
47407 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47408 LatexCommand bibitem
47414 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47417 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47421 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47423 \begin_inset Newline newline
47427 \begin_inset Flex URL
47430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47432 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47440 \begin_layout Bibliography
47441 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47442 LatexCommand bibitem
47448 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47451 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47455 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47456 for Cyrillic languages:
47457 \begin_inset Newline newline
47461 \begin_inset Flex URL
47464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47466 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47474 \begin_layout Bibliography
47475 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47476 LatexCommand bibitem
47482 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47485 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47489 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47491 \begin_inset Newline newline
47495 \begin_inset Flex URL
47498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47500 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47508 \begin_layout Bibliography
47509 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47510 LatexCommand bibitem
47516 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47519 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47523 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47525 \begin_inset Newline newline
47529 \begin_inset Flex URL
47532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47534 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47542 \begin_layout Bibliography
47543 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47544 LatexCommand bibitem
47550 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47553 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47557 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47559 \begin_inset Newline newline
47563 \begin_inset Flex URL
47566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47568 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47576 \begin_layout Bibliography
47577 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47578 LatexCommand bibitem
47584 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47587 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47591 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47593 \begin_inset Newline newline
47597 \begin_inset Flex URL
47600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47602 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47610 \begin_layout Bibliography
47611 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47612 LatexCommand bibitem
47618 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47621 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47625 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47627 \begin_inset Newline newline
47631 \begin_inset Flex URL
47634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47636 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47644 \begin_layout Bibliography
47645 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47646 LatexCommand bibitem
47652 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47655 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47659 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47661 \begin_inset Newline newline
47665 \begin_inset Flex URL
47668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47670 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47678 \begin_layout Bibliography
47679 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47680 LatexCommand bibitem
47686 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47689 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47693 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47695 \begin_inset Newline newline
47699 \begin_inset Flex URL
47702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47704 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47712 \begin_layout Bibliography
47713 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47714 LatexCommand bibitem
47720 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47723 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47727 about new features in
47733 \begin_inset Newline newline
47737 \begin_inset Flex URL
47740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47742 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47750 \begin_layout Standard
47751 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47785 \begin_inset Note Note
47788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47795 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47796 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47797 bibliography is the second one:
47805 \begin_layout Standard
47806 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47807 LatexCommand bibtex
47808 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47809 options "biblio/alphadin"
47816 \begin_layout Standard
47817 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47821 \begin_layout Standard
47822 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47823 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47829 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47830 LatexCommand printindex